Panasonic FP Sigma Programmable Controllers User's Manual

Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 888.723.4773 - Web: www.ctiautomation.net - Email: [email protected]

http://www.ctiautomation.net/Panasonic-FP-Sigma-Series.htm

Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents. To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use. Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety. This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.

If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product.

WARNING

-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor. -Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion. -Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts. -Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of fire.

If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product.

CAUTION

-To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications. -Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation. -Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock. -Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit. -Connect the wires or connectors securely. The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation. -Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the inside of the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation. -Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power supply is on. It could lead to an electric shock.

Copyright / Trademarks -This manual and its contents are copyrighted. -You may not copy this manual, in whole or part, without written consent of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. -Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. -All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

PLC_BAT


Table of Contents Before You Start Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller Programming Tool Restrictions When Changing Ladder Program from 12k Type to 32k Type Compatibility with FP0 Manuals to be Used

1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit .................................................. 1-1

1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit ............................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Unit Types ........................................................................................................................ 1-6

1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations ............................................................................. 1-12

1.4 Programming Tools ....................................................................................................... 1-14

2 Specifications and Functions of the Unit .............................................. 2-1

2.1 Parts and Functions ........................................................................................................ 2-2

2.2 Input and Output Specifications .................................................................................... 2-6

2.3 Terminal Layout Diagram ............................................................................................. 2-11

2.4 Analog Potentiometer ................................................................................................... 2-13

2.5 Thermister Input (Only for TM type) ............................................................................ 2-14

2.6 Clock/Calendar Function .............................................................................................. 2-17

3 Expansion ................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Type of Expansion Unit ................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Expansion Method of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit ......................................................... 3-3

3.3 Expansion Method of FPΣ Expansion Unit ................................................................... 3-4

3.4 Specifications of FPΣ Expansion Unit ........................................................................... 3-5

4 I/O Allocation ............................................................................................ 4-1

4.1 I/O Allocation .................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Allocation of FPΣ Control Unit ....................................................................................... 4-3


4.3 Allocation of FPΣ Expansion Unit .................................................................................. 4-4

4.4 Allocation of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit ........................................................................ 4-5

5 Installation and Wiring ............................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 5-2

5.2 Wiring of Power Supply .................................................................................................. 5-8

5.3 Wiring of Input and Output ........................................................................................... 5-11

5.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type...................................................................................... 5-15

5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type ..................................................................................... 5-17

5.6 Safety Measures ............................................................................................................ 5-19

5.7 Handling of Backup Battery.......................................................................................... 5-21

6 High-speed counter, Pulse Output and PWM Output functions .......... 6-1

6.1 Overview of Each Functions........................................................................................... 6-2

6.3 High-speed Counter Function ...................................................................................... 6-10

6.4 Pulse Output Function .................................................................................................. 6-18

6.5 PWM Output Function ................................................................................................... 6-58

7 Communication Cassette ........................................................................ 7-1

7.1 Functions and Types ....................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Communication Specifications .................................................................................... 7-10

7.3 Installation and Wiring .................................................................................................. 7-14

7.4 Communication Function 1: Computer Link ............................................................... 7-18

7.5 Communication Function: General-purpose Serial Communication ....................... 7-35

7.6 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) link .................................................................. 7-50

7.7 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU Communication ................................... 7-71

8 Security Functions ................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Type of Security Functions............................................................................................. 8-2


8.2 Password Protect Function ............................................................................................ 8-3

8.3 Upload Protection FPΣ 32k Type Only ........................................................................ 8-10

8.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader ..................................................................... 8-11

8.5 Table of Security Settings/Cancel ................................................................................ 8-15

9 Other Functions ....................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 P13 (ICWT) Instruction .................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2 Sampling Trace Function 32k Type Only .................................................................... 9-3

10 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ................................................ 10-1

10.1 Self-Diagnostic function ............................................................................................. 10-2

10.2 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 10-3

11 Precautions During Programming ...................................................... 11-1

11.1 Use of Duplicated Output ........................................................................................... 11-2

11.2 Handling BCD Data ...................................................................................................... 11-4

11.3 Handling Index Registers ........................................................................................... 11-5

11.4 Operation Errors .......................................................................................................... 11-7

11.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method ........................................................ 11-9

11.6 Precautions for Programming .................................................................................. 11-13

11.7 Rewrite Function During RUN .................................................................................. 11-14

11.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output ......................................................... 11-19

12 Specifications ...................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Table of Specifications ............................................................................................... 12-2

12.2 I/O No. Allocation ....................................................................................................... 12-12

12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants .................................................................... 12-14

13 Dimensions .......................................................................................... 13-1


13.1 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 13-2

13.2 Connection Diagram with Motor Driver ..................................................................... 13-5

13.3 FP0 Power Supply Unit (AFP0634) ............................................................................. 13-6

13.4 Cable/Adapter Specifications ..................................................................................... 13-7

14 Appendix ............................................................................................... 14-1

14.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers .................... 14-2

14.2 Table of Basic Instructions ....................................................................................... 14-33

14.3 Table of High-level Instructions ............................................................................... 14-41

14.4 Table of Error codes .................................................................................................. 14-61

14.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands ..................................................... 14-74

14.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD .......................................................................................... 14-75

14.7 ASCII Codes ............................................................................................................... 14-76


Before You Start

Operating environment (Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing) -Ambient temperatures:0 ~ +55 °C -Ambient humidity: 30% to 85% RH (at 25°C, non-condensing) -Keep the height below 2000m. -For use in pollution Degree 2 environment. -Do not use it in the following environments. - Direct sunlight - Sudden temperature changes causing condensation. - Inflammable or corrosive gas. -Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter. - Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia

or caustic soda. -Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water. - Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.(100mm or more)

Static electricity - Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage. - Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product.

Power supplies -Twist the wires of the power supply. -The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line. However, it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power. -Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line, input/output device and operating device. -If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse. -Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion units from a single power supply. Turning on/off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously.

Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence, make sure to turn off the control unit before the input/output power supply. If the input/output power supply is turned off before the control unit, or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily, the controller detects change of input level, and might conduct an unexpected operation

Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time, be sure to take the precautions given below. -When performing installation, check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring, particularly conductive fragments, adhering to the unit. -Verify that the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and power supply voltage are all correct. -Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws. -Set the mode selector to PROG. Mode.


Before entering a program -Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program. -For information on the operating procedure, refer to the manuals of tool software. (Tool software: FPWIN Pro, FPWIN GR)

Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs, the user should consider the following measures. -Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs, destroying files, or overwriting the contents of a file, documents should be printed out and then saved. -Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten. If the password is forgotten, however, it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to. Also, if a password is forcibly bypassed, the program is deleted. When specifying the password, note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point.

Battery Do not install the battery when it is not used. There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged.


Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller

Usable model Version Usable functions

12k type

V1.11 V1.20 V1.24 V1.30 V1.40 V1.50

Addition of F174(SP0H) instruction By SYS1 instruction

Detection edge setting for external input interrupt MEWTOCOL-COM Response time setting

Writing into DT90014, DT90037, DT90038 by F0(MV) instruction Operand and index modification by F12(ICRD)/P13(ICWT) instruction Shortening of polling cycle by MEWTOCOL-COM during 1:N communication Setting for dealing the previous value of DF instruction in the system register 4th bit D and MC

60-step acceleration/deceleration by F171(SPDH) instruction Target value match stop mode by F172(PLSH) instruction

R9005 and R9006 is always announced when the battery error occurs.

12k type

Change in the detection timing of the battery error. It is detected 2 seconds after the power is on.

V2.00 V2.01 V2.10 V2.40 V2.50

Left expansion refresh is available. Operand and index modification by F12(ICRD)/P13(ICWT) instruction Shortening of polling cycle by MEWTOCOL-COM during 1:N communication Setting for dealing the previous value of DF instruction in the system register 4th bit D and MC R9005 and R9006 is always announced when the batter error occurs.

32k type

Change in the detection timing of the battery error. It is detected 2 seconds after the power is on.

V3.00

Interrupt program can be started when the high-speed counter target value matches. Scan time display in 100us unit 10us ring counter DT90020 General-purpose communication function with TOOL port MODBUS-RTU master/slave communication function (COM1, COM2) MEWTOCOL-COM master communication function (COM1, COM2) 32k-step program capacity Enhancement of comment capacity Enhancement of security functions

If failed to input a correct 4-digit password for 3 times in succession, the operation cannot be continued. 8-digit password Prohibition of program readout Forced cancel of security Reading of security information

Reverse setting function of PC link (32k type only) R9005 and R9006 is always announced when the battery error occurs. Change in the detection timing of the battery error. It is detected 2 seconds after the power is on.

Real number basic compare instructions 18 types

STF=S1, S2 STF<>S1, S2 STF>S1, S2 STF>=S1, S2 STF<S1, S2 STF<=S1, S2

ANF=S1, S2 ANF<>S1, S2 ANF>S1, S2 ANF>=S1, S2 ANF<S1, S2 ANF<=S1, S2

ORF=S1, S2 ORF<>S1, S2 ORF>S1, S2 ORF>=S1, S2 ORF<S1, S2 ORF<=S1, S2


Usable model Version Usable functions

32k type V3.00

<Special instructions> F230 (TMSEC) F231 (SECTM) F354 (FSCAL)

<Serial data conversion> F250 (BTOA) Binary → ASCII conversion F251 (ATOB) ASCII → Binary conversion

<SYS instructions> UP/DOWN switching of HSC by SYS1 instruction Addition of 8-digit password operation by SYS1 instruction Addition of operation by SYS2 instruction

MODBUS master instructions F145 (SEND) Data send F146 (RECV) Data receive

MEWTOCOL master instructions F145 (SEND) Data send F146 (RECV) Data receive

F356 (EZPID) Easy PID instructions <Partial I/O refresh>

Partial I/O refresh for FP0 expansion <10us ring counter current value read>

F0 (MV) DT90020, D

32k type

<New PID instruction> F356 (EZPID)

V3.10

F182(FILTR) Time constant processing Sampling trace function (Refer to Chapter 9.)

Sampling by instructions F155(SMPL) Sampling F156(STRG) Sampling trigger Sampling by specifying time

Leading contact, trailing contact instructions ST↑ AN↑ OR↑ ST↓ AN↓ OR↓

An arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of Timer/counter instruction.

e.g.) TML 0, DT0 Other additional convenient instructions

F252(ACHK) ASCII data check F284(RAMP) Inclination output Baud rate setting (300, 600, 1200 bps) by SYS instruction

High-speed operation F0(MV) and F1(DMV) instructions Execution time: Approx. 1us Only when every operands are without index modifier.

Function addition to existing instructions F70(BCC) Block check code calculation F356(EZPID) Easy PID instruction

Reference: <Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>


Programming Tool Restrictions

Type of programming tool

Type of unit

FPG-C32T FPT-C32TTM

FPG-C32T2 FPG-C28P2 FPG-C24R2 FPG-C32T2TM FPG-C28P2TM FPG-C24R2TM

FPG-C32TH FPG-C32THTM

FPG-C32T2H FPG-C28P2H FPG-C24R2H FPG-C32T2HTM FPG-C28P2HTM FPG-C24R2HTM

Windows software

FPWIN GR Ver.2

Used Used

(Ver. 2.1 or later)

Used (Ver. 2.6 or

later)

Used (Ver. 2.6 or

later) FPWIN GR Ver.1

Not used Not used Not used Not used

Windows software Conforms to IEC61131-3

FPWIN Pro Ver.6

Used Used Used Used

Handy programming unit

AFP1113V2 AFP1114V2


AFP1113 AFP1114


AFP1111A AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112


Note: Precautions concerning version upgrade - In case of using FPWIN GR Ver.1, please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver.2. - FPWIN GR Ver. 2.0 can be upgraded to Ver. 2.1 or later free of charge at our web site. - FPWIN Pro Ver. 6.0 can be upgraded to Ver. 6.1 or later free of charge at our web site.


Changing Program from 12k Type to 32k Type Program compatibility - Between the 12k type and the 32k type, the number of internal relays and the hold type areas backed

up in the F-ROM area when the power turns off differ as the figure shown below. - When a battery for memory backup is used, the hold type area can be set by system registers

regardless of the areas shown below.

Procedure for changing program type As a program that has been converted cannot be converted inversely, back up the program before conversion. 1. Retrieve a program to be converted with FPWIN GR. 2. Select "Tool" > "Change PLC Type" in the menu bar. The "Select PLC Type" dialog box appears.

3. Select "FP SIGMA 32K" and press the "OK" button. The type conversion wizard appears.


4. Press the "Next" button. The menu for selecting "Initialize system register No. 7" is displayed.

Selection Value of system register No.7 Starting word No. of internal relay hold area

Non-hold/hold type setting after conversion

Non-hold area Hold area

Initialize 248 WR0 to WR247 （R0 to R247F）

WR248 to WR255 （R2480 to R255F）

Not initialize 90 WR0 to WR89 （R0 to R89F）

WR90 to WR255 （R900 to R255F）

Note: - When a memory backup battery is not used, select "Initialize" in the above wizard. If "Not initialize" is

selected, the value of data in the hold area may be indefinite. 5. Select "Initialize" or "Not initialize", and press the "Next" button. The menu for selecting a "program conversion method" is displayed. See the next page for the examples of conversion methods.

6. Select a program conversion method and press the "Execute" button. The program is converted by the specified method and a message indicating that the conversion was completed is displayed.


Key Point: The results of various conversions when the following program of FPΣ (12k) type is converted are shown below.

1

- Programs for transferring internal relays in the hold type area are inserted before and after the program before conversion.

When selecting "Add transfer program automatically";

- The internal relay numbers in the program before conversion are not converted. - As program compatibility is retained, for accessing corresponding internal relays from an external

device such as a programmable display, it is not necessary to change the settings of the external device.

2

- Only internal relay numbers are converted. When selecting "Convert internal relay No. automatically";

- Internal relays WR90 to WR97 in the program before conversion are converted to WR248 to WR255. - For accessing corresponding internal relays from an external device such as a programmable display, it

is necessary to change the settings of the external device.

3

- Both program and internal relay numbers are not converted. When selecting "Not change";


Detail of conversion when selecting "Add transfer program automatically" - Compatibility can be retained with the existing program by partially adding a transfer program without

modifying the existing program. - Also, for connecting a device such as a programmable display, it is not necessary to change switches

and internal relays R and WR referred by data parts on the programmable display.

<Explanation of program> 1 Beginning of a program Transfers the contents stored in the hold area of internal relays (WR248 to WR255) to the existing hold area (WR90 to WR97) when the power turns on, and returns the area (WR90 to WR97) to the previous state before the power turns off. (because the area WR90 to WR97 cannot be held without a battery on V3.)

2 End of a program After returning to the previous state that is the one before the power turns off, always transfers the WR operated during the scan or the information of R input from a programmable display (WR90 to WR97) to the hold area (WR248 to WR255). And prepares for holding data when the power turns off.


Compatibility with FP0

Program compatibility The following points require attention if using FP0 programs on the FPΣ. • Pulse output function

With the FPΣ, please be aware that the following changes have been made to instructions concerning pulse output.

Instruction For FP0 For FPΣ

Trapezoidal control F168(SPD1) F171(SPDH) Jog feed F169(PLS) F172(PLSH) Data table control None F174(SP0H) Linear interpolation control None F175(SPSH) Note1) Circular interpolation control None F176(SPCH) Note1) PWM output F170(PWM) F173(PWMH)

Availability of linear and circular interpolation control is limited depending on the types of FPΣ Control Unit.

Type Using F175, F176 C32/C32TH C32H/C32HTM

Not available

C32T2/C32T2TM C32T2H/C32T2HTM

Available

C28P2/C28P2TM C28P2H/C28P2HTM

Available

C24R2/C24R2TM C24R2H/C24R2HTM

Not available

• Serial data communication function

With the FPΣ, please be aware that the following changes have been made to instructions concerning serial data communication.

Instruction For FP0 For FPΣ

Serial data communication F144(TRNS) F159(MTRN) Note2) Note) The F159 (MTRN) instruction is used only with an FPΣ in which the conventional F144 (TRNS)

instruction has been set up to correspond to multiple communication ports. Please be aware that the conventional F144 (TRNS) instruction cannot be used with the FPΣ.


Manuals to be Used

Necessary manuals vary according to the unit used. Check the following table and prepare required manuals.

Unit type User's Manual ARCT1F333E

Programming Manual ARCT1F353E

Exclusive manual

FPΣ Control unit Yes Yes FPΣ Expansion I/O unit Yes Yes No FPΣ Positioning unit Yes Yes ARCT1F365E FPΣ Expansion data memory unit

Yes Yes No

FPΣ CC-Link slave unit Yes Yes ARCT1F380E FPΣ S-LINK unit Yes Yes ARCT1F403E FPΣ Communication cassette

Yes Yes No

Key Point: • As for requesting for manuals, please contact your dealer or download the PDF data from our web site.



Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit


1.1 Features and Functions of the Unit Powerful control capabilities All of the functions of a mid-scale PLC are packed into the compact body size of the 32-pont type FP0. A program capacity of 12k steps or 32k steps is provided as a standard feature, so you never have to worry about how much memory is left as you’re programming. In addition, 32k words are reserved for data registers, so large volumes of data can be compiled and multiple operations can be processed without running out of memory. A full range of communication functions Using the Tool port (RS232C) provided as a standard feature on the main unit, communication can be carried out with a display panel or computer. Additionally, communication cassettes with RS232C and RS485 interfaces are available as an option. Installing a 2-channel RS232C type communication cassette in the FPΣ makes it possible to connect two devices with RS232C port. A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1:N communication (up to 99 units) and PC(PLC) link function (up to 16 units). Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FPΣ When using the 2-channel RS232C type communication cassette

1:N communication possible with up to 99 stations (units) When using the 1-channel RS485 type communication cassette When using the 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C in combination


Data can be share among the various PLCs using the PC(PLC) link function When using the 1-channel RS485 type communication cassette When using the 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C combination type

PC(PLC) link function (up to 16 units) or 1:N communication (up to 99 units) with RS232C devices When using the 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C in combination

Analog control supported An analog potentiometer (volume dial) is provided as a standard feature. This can be used in applications such as analog timers, without using the programming tools. An analog unit is also available as the intelligent unit. Type with thermister input function For the units of which part numbers or product numbers end in “TM”, the leader line which enables the thermister input is equipped instead of an analog potentiometer. The change of the resistance value of the thermister can be taken in as an analog value. (The thermister of which resistance value is from 200 to 75 kΩ can be used.) Calender timer function can be added Optional backup battery enables the calender timer function.


Positioning control supported through high-speed counter and pulse output A high-speed counter and pulse output functions are provided as standard features. The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100kHz, enabling positioning control using a stepping motor or servo motor. Measurement using high-speed counter supported Increment input mode, decrement input mode, 2-phase input mode, individual input mode, and direction discrimination mode are supported.

Positioning control based on pulse output supported Pulse/direction and clockwise/counter –clockwise output are supported.

Heater control based on PWM output function supported The pulse output at any duty ratio can be picked up with special instruction.


Security functions have been enhanced. 1. Upload protection. (Enables not to upload programs.) 2. 8-digit alphameric password 3. 4-digit numeric password Easy temperature control instruction has been added. It enables to perform the operation easily like a temperature control device. Single-line PID instruction has been added. Three-port general purpose serial communication The tool port also supports the general-purpose serial communication. Modbus RTU master unit and slave units Communication with a temperature control device, inverter or measuring instruments can be performed with simple programs using the FPΣ as a master unit. Communication with the existing network can be performed using the FPΣ as slave units. MEWTOCOL master unit Programs for the MEWTOCOL communication master unit can be easily created. Rewrite function during RUN Programs can be changed during RUN up to 512k steps.


1.2 Unit Types

1.2.1 FPΣ Control Units

12k type (Products discontinued as of May 2008) Name Number of I/O points Part No. Product No.

FPΣ Control unit

Input: 16 points/Transistor output: 16 points NPN

FPG-C32T AFPG2543


FPG-C32T2 AFPG2643

Input: 16 points/Transistor output: 12 points PNP

FPG-C28P2 AFPG2653

Input: 16 points/Relay output: 8 points FPG-C24R2 AFPG2423

FPΣ Control unit With thermister input function


FPG-C32TTM AFPG2543TM


FPG-C32T2TM AFPG2643TM


FPG-C28P2TM AFPG2653TM

Input: 16 points/Relay output: 8 points FPG-C24R2TM AFPG2423TM Note) The FPΣ expansion I/O unit cannot be added to FPG-C32T nor FPG-C32TTM FPΣ control unit. 32k type

Name Number of I/O points Part No. Product No.

FPΣ Control unit (High capacity type) Program capacity: 32k


FPG-C32TH AFPG2543H


FPG-C32T2H AFPG2643H


FPG-C28P2H AFPG2653H

Input: 16 points/Relay output: 8 points FPG-C24R2H AFPG2423H

FPΣ Control unit (High capacity type) Program capacity: 32k With thermister input function


FPG-C32THTM

AFPG2543HTM


FPG-C32T2HTM

AFPG2643HTM


FPG-C28P2HTM

AFPG2653HTM

Input: 16 points/Relay output: 8 points FPG-C24R2HTM

AFPG2423HTM

Note) The FPΣ expansion I/O unit cannot be added to FPG-C32TH nor FPG-C32THTM FPΣ control unit.


1.2.2 FPΣ Expansion Units

Name Specifications Part No. Product No. Manual

FPΣ Expansion I/O unit


FPG-XY64D2T AFPG3467 This manual


FPG-XY64D2P AFPG3567

FPΣ Positioning unit

Transistor output: 1-axis type FPG-PP11 AFPG430

ARCT1F365E Transistor output: 2-axis type FPG-PP21 AFPG431 Line driver output: 1-axis type FPG-PP12 AFPG432 Line driver output: 2-axis type FPG-PP22 AFPG433

FPΣ Positioning unit RTEX

2-axis type FPG-PN2AN AFPG43610 ARCT1F421E 4-axis type FPG-PN4AN AFPG43620

8-axis type FPG-PN8AN AFPG43630

FPΣ S-LINK unit 128 input/output points using S-LINK

FPG-SL AFPG780 ARCT1F403E

FPΣ CC-Link slave unit

Number of points of exchanged data with CC-Link master station Max. 224 points (Input: 112 points, output: 112 point) Writing max. 16-word data Reading 4-word data

FPG-CCLS AFPG7943 ARCT1F380E

FPΣ Expansion data memory unit

256 kbyte FPG-EM1 AFPG201 This manual

Note) The FPΣ expansion I/O unit cannot be added to FPG-C32T nor FPG-C32TTM FPΣ control unit.


1.2.3 FP0R Expansion Units

Product name

Specifications

Product No. No. of I/O points Power supply voltage

Input Output Connection type

FP0R-E8 Expansion Unit

8 points (Input: 8 points) - 24V DC

±common - MIL connector AFP0RE8X

8 points (Input: 4 points, Output: 4 points)

24V DC

24V DC ±common

Relay output: 2A

Terminal block AFP0RE8RS

Molex connector AFP0RE8RM

8 points (Output: 8 points)

24V DC - Relay output:

2A Terminal block AFP0RE8YRS

8 points (Output: 8 points) - -

Transistor output: (NPN) 0.3A

MIL connector AFP0RE8YT


Transistor output: (PNP) 0.3A

MIL connector AFP0RE8YP

FP0R-E16 Expansion unit

16 points (Input: 16 points) - 24V DC

±common - MIL connector AFP0RE16X


24V DC

24V DC ±common

Relay output: 2A

Terminal block AFP0RE16RS

Molex connector AFP0RE16RM


- 24V DC ±common


MIL connector AFP0RE16T


- 24V DC ±common


MIL connector AFP0RE16P



MIL connector AFP0RE16YT



MIL connector AFP0RE16YP

FP0R-E32 Expansion unit


- 24V DC ±common


MIL connector AFP0RE32T


- 24V DC ±common


MIL connector AFP0RE32P


1.2.4 FP0 Intelligent Units

Product name Specifications Part No. Product No. Manual

FP0 A/D converter unit

<Input specifications> No. of channels: 8 channels Input range: Voltage: 0 to 5 V, -10 to +10 V,

-100 to 100 mV (Resolution: 1/4000) Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)

FP0-A80 AFP0401 ARCT1F321

FP0 Thermocouple unit

K, J, T, R thermocouples, resolution: 0.1°C FP0-TC4 AFP0420 ARCT1F366

K, J, T, R thermocouples, resolution: 0.1°C FP0-TC8 AFP0421

FP0 RTD (Resistance-temperature detector) unit

Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000 Resolution: 0.1°C/0.01°C (Switch type) FP0-RTD6 AFP0430 ARCT1F445

FP0 Analog I/O unit

<Input specifications> No. of channels: 2 channels Input range: Voltage: 0 to 5V, -10 to +10V (Resolution: 1/4000) Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)

FP0-A21 AFP0480 ARCT1F390 <Output specifications> No. of channels: 1 channel Output range: Voltage: -10 to +10V (Resolution: 1/4000) Current: 0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)

FP0 D/A converter unit

<Output specifications> No. of channels: 4 channels Output range: (Voltage output type): -10 to +10V (Resolution: 1/4000) (Current output type): 4 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/4000)

FP0-A04V AFP04121

ARCT1F382

FP0-A04I AFP04123

1.2.5 FPΣ Communication Cassette Name Description Part No. Product No.

FPΣ Communication cassette 1-channel RS232C type

This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a five-wire RS232C port. RS/CS control is possible.

FPG-COM1 AFPG801

FPΣ Communication cassette 2-channel RS232C type

This communication cassette is a 2-channel unit with a three-wire RS232C port. Communication with two external devices is possible.

FPG-COM2 AFPG802

FPΣ Communication cassette 1-channel RS485 type

This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a two-wire RS485 port. FPG-COM3 AFPG803

FPΣ Communication cassette 1-channel RS485 type & 1-channel RS232C type

This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a two-wire RS485 port and a 1-channel unit with a three-wire RS232C port. FPG-COM4 AFPG806


1.2.6 Link Units

Product name Specifications Power supply voltage

Part No. Product No. Manual

FP0 I/O Link unit

This is a link unit designed to make the FP0 function as a slave unit to MEWNET-F (remote I/O system).

24V DC FP0-IOL AFP0732 This manual

FP0 CC-Link Slave unit

This unit is for making the FP0 function as a slave unit of the CC-Link. Only one unit can be connected to the furthest right edge of the FP0 expansion bus. Note) Accuracy will change if an FP0 thermocouple unit is used at the same time.

24V DC FP0-CCLS AFP07943 ARCT1F380

C-NET Adapter S2 type (for PLC tool port side)

This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the computer link function for connecting to a host computer via C-NET. It comes with a cable (30 cm) for tool port side. A power supply is not required.

- - AFP15402

ARCT1F96

C-NET Adapter (For computer side)

This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the computer link function for connecting to a network-connected PLC via C-NET from a host computer.

100 to 240V AC - AFP8536

24V DC - AFP8532

FP Web-Server2 unit

This is a unit to conduct Ethernet connection for FP series PLCs and RS232C devices. It is equipped with web and mail functions.

FP-WEB2 AFP0611 ARCT1F446

1.2.7 Power Supply Unit

Product name Specifications Part No. Product No. FP0 Power supply unit

Input voltage: 100 to 240 VAC Free input Output capacity: 0.7 A, 24 VDC FP0-PSA4 AFP0634


1.2.8 Options

Product name Specifications Product No.

Options for memory backup

Backup battery for FPΣ Necessary for the backup of data

registers, etc. or for using the clock/calendar function.

With a connector AFPG804

High-capacity battery folder for FPΣ

Folder with a connector for a commercial battery CR123A

AFPG807 (Folder only)

FP Memory loader Programming tool for copying programs written to a control unit

Data clear type AFP8670 Data hold type AFP8671

FP0 Mounting plate

Slim 30 type Mounting plate for mounting FPΣ Control unit or FPΣ Expansion I/O unit on a panel vertically.

AFP0811 (10-pack)

Slim type Mounting plate for mounting FP0/FP0R Expansion unit or Intelligent unit on a panel vertically.

AFP0803 (10-pack)

Flat type Mounting plate for mounting FPΣ Control unit on a panel horizontally.

AFP0804 (10-pack)

Wiring tools

Terminal screwdriver

Required for connecting the terminal block (made by Phoenix Contact Co.) supplied with FPΣ Control unit (relay output type). AFP0806

Multi-wire connector pressure contact tool

Required for connecting the connectors supplied with FPΣ Control unit (transistor type) or FPΣ Expansion I/O unit. AXY52000FP

Flat cable connector

Required for wiring with flat cables.

For FPΣ Control unit (transistor output type), 10P

AFP0808 (4-pack)

For FPΣ Expansion I/O unit, 40P

AFP2802 (2-pack)

I/O cable

For FPΣ Control unit (transistor output type) and FP0R Expansion unit. Loose-wiring cable, with connector attached at one end. 10 leads, AWG22 (0.3mm2), 2 pcs (blue and white) /set.

Length: 1 m AFP0521 (2 cable set)

Length: 3m AFP0523 (2 cable set)

Note) For using the high-capacity battery folder for FPΣ, purchase a commercial CR123A battery.

1.2.9 Maintenance Parts

Product name Specifications Product No. Terminal socket Attaches to FPΣ control unit (relay output type). 9P AFP0802 (2-pack)

Wire-press socket Attaches to FPΣ control unit (transistor output type). 10P AFP0807 (2-pack) Attaches to FPΣ expansion I/O unit and FPΣ positioning unit. 40P AFP2801 (2-pack)

Wire-press contact

For FPΣ control unit (transistor output type), FPΣ expansion I/O unit and FPΣ positioning unit.

Suitable wire: AWG #22/ AWG #24

AXW7221FP (5 pins in line)

Suitable wire: AWG #26/ AWG #28

AXW7231FP (5 pins in line)

Power cable for FP0R/FPΣ Attaches to FP0R/FPΣ control unit. Length: 1 m AFPG805 (1-pack) Power cable for FP0 Attaches to FP0/FP0R expansion unit. Length: 1 m AFP0581 (1-pack)

Note) Order wire-press contacts in units of 200 pins in 40 rows.


1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations

1.3.1 Restrictions on FP0 Expansion Unit

Up to three expansion units can be added on the right of the FPΣ, these expansion units being either expansion units or intelligent units from the earlier FP0 series, or a combination of the two. A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible. Controllable I/O points

Type of control unit Number of I/O points when using control unit

Number of I/O points when using FP0 expansion unit

FPG-C32 32 points Max. 128 points FPG-C28 28 points Max. 124 points FPG-C24 24 points Max. 120 points Note1)

Note1) This is the number of points when combining with the transistor type FP0 expansion unit.

Note: • Install the FP0 thermocouple unit on the right side of all other expansion units. If it is installed on the

left side, the total precision will deteriorate. • Install the FP0 CC-Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units. There is no expansion

connector on the right side. • Install the FP0 RTD unit on the right side of the other expansion units.


1.3.2 Restrictions on FPΣ Expansion Unit

Up to four dedicated FPΣ expansion units can be added on the left of the FPΣ. The 64 points type expansion unit consists of 32 input points and 32 transistor NPN output points. Controllable I/O points

Type of control unit Number of I/O points when using control unit

Number of I/O points when using FPΣ expansion unit

FPG-C32 Note1) 32 points Max. 128 points Note2) FPG-C28 28 points Max. 124 points Note2) FPG-C24 24 points Max. 120 points

Note1) The FPΣ cannot be used for FPG-C32T, FPG-C32TTM, FPG-C32TH nor FPG-C32THTM. Note2) This is the number of points when combining with the 64-point type FPΣ expansion unit.

Key Point: If using FP0 expansion units and FPΣ expansion units in combination, the number of input and output points can be expanded to a maximum of 384 points for FPG-C32T2 and FPG-C32T2TM.


1.4 Programming Tools

1.4.1 Tools Needed for Programming

1. Programming tool software• The tool software can also be used with the FP

series.• “FPWIN Pro Ver.6” or “FPWIN GR Ver.2”

Windows software is used with FPΣ.See Also: Programming Tool Restrictions

2. PC connection cable• The connection cable is available.

1.4.2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable

Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN-GR Ver.2

Type of software OS (Operating system)

Hard disk capacity Product No.

FPWIN GR Ver.2 English-language menu

Full type Windows98 WindowsMe Windows2000 WindowsXP Windows Vista Windows7

40MB or more

AFPS10520

Upgrade version AFPS10520R

Note1) Ver.1.1 must be installed to install the upgrade version. Note2) Ver.2.0 can be upgraded to Ver. 2.1 or later free of charge at our web site

Conforms to IEC61131-3 programming tool software FPWIN-Pro Ver.6 Type of software OS (Operating system) Hard disk capacity Product No.

FPWIN Pro Ver.6 English-language menu

Windows2000 WindowsXP Windows Vista Windows7

100MB or more FPWINPROFEN6

Note1) Ver.6.0 can be upgraded to Ver. 6.1 or later free of charge at our web site

Type of computer and suitable cable

Connector Specifications Product No.

D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin female-Mini DIN round 5-pin AFC8503 D-sub 0-pin female-Mini DIN round 5-pin straight type AFC8503S


Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of the Unit


2.1 Parts and Functions

① Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error.

LED LED and operation status

RUN (green) Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is being executed. It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG. LEDs flash alternately.)

PROG. (green)

Lights when in the PROG. Mode and indicates that operation has stopped. Lights when in the PROG. Mode during forced input/output. It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG. LEDs flash alternately.)

ERROR/ALARM (red)

Flashes when an error is detected during the self-diagnostic function. (ERROR) Lights if a hardware error occurs, or if operation slows because of the program, and the watchdog timer is activated. (ALARM)


② RUN/PROG. mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC.

Switch position Operation mode

RUN (upward) This sets the RUN mode. The program is executed is executed and operation begins.

PROG. (downward) This sets the PROG. mode. The operation stops. In this mode, programming can be done using tools.

• The remote switching operation from the programming tool is operable. • When performing remote switching from the programming tool, the setting of the mode switch and the

actual mode of operation may differ. Verify the mode with the status indicator LED. • Restart FPΣ to operate in the mode set with the RUN/PROG. mode switch. ③ Communication status LEDs These LEDs display the communication status of the COM.1 and COM.2 ports.

LED LED and communication status

COM.1 S

Transmitted data monitor

Flashes while data is being transmitted. Goes out when no data is being transmitted.

R Received data monitor

Flashes while data is being received. Goes out when no data is being received.

COM.2

S Transmitted data monitor

Flashes while data is being transmitted. (In case of 1-channel RS232C1 type, lights when the RS signal is ON.) Goes out when no data is being received.

R Received data monitor

Flashes while data is being received. (In case of 1-channel RS232C1 type, lights when the CS signal is ON.) Goes out when no data is being received.

④ Tool port (RS232C) This port is used to connect a programming tool. A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit.

Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction 1 Signal Ground SG 2 Transmitted Data SD Unit → External device 3 Received Data RD Unit ← External device 4 (Not used) 5 +5V +5V Unit → External device

• The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory. The system register should be used to change these.

- Baud rate …….. 9600 bps - Character bit …. 8 bit - Parity check ….. Odd parity - Stop bit length .. 1 bit ⑤ Input connector

⑥ Input indicator LEDs ⑦ Output connector


⑧ Output indicator LEDs ⑨ Analog potentiometer (analog dial) (excluding the type of which part No. and product No. ends in TM) Turning this dial changes the values of special data register DT90040 and DT90041 within the range of K0 to K1000. It can be used for analog timers and other applications. ⑩ Power supply connector (24V DC) Supply 24V DC. It is connected using the power supply cable (AFPG805) that comes with the unit. ⑪ Left-side connector for FPΣ expansion This is used to connect dedicated FPΣ expansion unit on the left side of the control unit with the internal circuit. Note) FPG-C32T nor FPG-C32TTM control units are not equipped with this connector. ⑫ Unit No. (Station No.) setting switch - The unit number setting switch is located under the left side cover of the unit. Unit numbers are set with

the switch and dial for using the communication function with an optional communication cassette. - The switch is set to OFF and the dial is set to 0 at the factory, and the unit number setting is available

using system registers. - When the switch is OFF and the dial is set to any of 1 to F, each unit number is 1 to 15. When the

switch is ON and the dial is set to any of 1 to F, each unit number is 16 to 31.

* Unit numbers can be set using system registers.

Note) The unit number of tool port cannot be set. Also, when using a 2-channel cassette, the both channels are set to the same unit number. (Using system registers enables to set each unit number individually.) ⑬ Communication cassette (option) This is the optional cassette type adapter used when communication is carried out. Any one of the following cassette types may be installed. - 1-channel RS232C type - 2-channel RS232C type - 1-channel RS485 type - 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C type in combination


⑭ Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units. The hook on the right side is also used for installation on flat type mounting plate (AFP0804). ⑮ Right-side connector for FP0 expansion This is used to connect an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit. (The connector is located under the seal.) ⑯ DIN hook The FPΣ unit enables attachment at a touch to a DIN rail. The lever is also used for installation on slim 30 type mounting plate (AFP0811). ⑰ Battery cover This is uncovered to mount the backup battery sold separately. The backup of the calendar timer function or data register is possible with the backup battery.

⑱ Thermister input line (The end of part No. and product No. is TM type only) It is used to connect the thermister to read the change in the resistance value of the thermister as analog input values.


2.2 Input and Output Specifications

2.2.1 Input Specifications

Input Specifications (for all types) Item Description

Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4V DC

Rated input current For X0, X1, X3, X4: approx. 8 mA For X2, X5 to X7: approx. 4.3 mA For X8 to XF: approx. 3.5 mA

Input points per common

For C32, C28: 16 points/common (X0 to XF/1 common) For C24: 8 point/common (X0 to X7/1 common, X8 to XF/1 common) (Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal.)

Min. on voltage/Min. on current For X0, X1, X3, X4: 19.2V DC/6 mA For X2, X5 to XF: 19.2V DC/3 mA

Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4V DC/1.3 mA

Input impedance For X0, X1, X3, X4: approx. 3 kΩ For X2, X5 to X7: approx. 5.6 kΩ For X8 to XF: approx. 6.8 kΩ

Response time off→on

For input X0, X1, X3, X4: 1 ms or less: normal input 5 µs or less: high-speed counter, pulse catch, interrupt input settings Note1)

For input X2, X5 to X7: 1 ms or less: normal input 100µs or less: high-speed counter, pulse catch, interrupt input settings Note1)

For input X8 to XF 1 ms or less: normal input only

on→off Same as above Operating mode indicator LED display

Note1) this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24V DC and the temperature is 25°C/70°F.


Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature.

Circuit diagram

[X0, X1, X3, X4] [X2, X5 to XF]

For X2, X5 to X7: R1=5.6kΩ R2=1kΩ For X8 to XF: R1=6.8kΩ R2=820Ω


2.2.2 Output Specifications

Transistor output specifications

Item Description C32(NPN) C28(PNP)

Insulation method Optical coupler Output type Open collector Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC 24V DC Operating load voltage range 4.75 to 26.4V DC 21.6 to 26.4V DC

Max. load current For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4: 0.3A For Y2, Y5 to YF: 0.1A

For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4: 0.5A For Y2, Y5 to YB: 0.3A

Max. surge current For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4: 0.9A For Y2, Y5 to YF: 0.5A

For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4: 1.5A For Y2, Y5 to YB: 0.7A

Output points per common 16 points/common 12 points/common Off state leakage current 100µA or less On state voltage drop 0.5V or less

Response time off→on

For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4 (at 15mA or less): 2µs or less For Y2, Y5 or later: 0.2ms or less

on→off For Y0, Y1, Y3, Y4 (at 15mA or less): 8µs or less For Y2, Y5 or later: 0.5ms or less

External power supply for driving internal circuit

Voltage 21.6 to 26.4V DC

Current 70mA or less

Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Phase fault protection Phase fault protection, thermal protection for Y2, Y5 or later

Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature.


Circuit diagram [C32] [Y0,Y1,Y3,Y4]

[C28] [Y0,Y1,Y3,Y4]

[Y2, Y5 to YF] [Y2, Y5 to YB]


Relay output specifications (C24) Item Description

Output type 1a output Rated control capacity 2A 250V AC, 2A 30V DC (4.5A per common or less) Note1) Output points per common 8 points/common

Response time off→on Approx. 10ms on→off Approx. 8ms

Mechanical lifetime Min. 20,000,000 operations Electrical lifetime Min. 100,000 operations Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED display

Note1) Resistance load

Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature.

Circuit diagram


2.3 Terminal Layout Diagram

2.3.1 Control Unit (for C32)

Input

Note) The four COM terminals of input circuit are connected internally. Output

Note) The two (+) terminals of output circuit are connected internally. The two (−) terminals of output circuit are connected internally.



Input

Note) The four COM terminals of input circuit are connected internally. Output

Note) The two (+) terminals of output circuit are connected internally. The two (−) terminals of output circuit are connected internally.


Input

Note) The two COM terminals of input circuit are not connected internally. Output


2.4 Analog Potentiometer

2.4.1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer

The FPΣ is equipped with two analog potentiometers as a standard feature. Turning the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within a range of K0 to K1000. Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the programming tool, so this can be used, for example, with analog clocks, to change the set value externally by turning the potentiometer.

Applicable special data register

Symbol Potentiometer No. Special data register Range of change V0 Volume 0 DT90040

K0 to K1000 V1 Volume 1 DT90041

2.4.2 Example Showing How to Use Analog Potentiometer

The FPΣ is provided with special data registers, in which the values in the registers change in response to the analog potentiometers being moved. If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting value area, a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer. Example: Writing of the clock setting value The value of the special data register (DT90040) that corresponds to the analog potentiometer V0 is sent to the setting value area (SV0) of TMX0 to set the time for the clock.


2.5 Thermister Input (Only for TM type)

2.5.1 Overview of Thermister Input

The control units of which part and product numbers end in “TM” is equipped with the leader lines which enable the thermister input instead of the analog potentiometer. The change in the termister’s resistance values can be loaded as analog values by connecting the thermister with these leader lines. Mechanism for loading thermister input • Loads the change in the resistance values of the thermister connected externally as the change in

voltage, and then loads it as digital values by the AD converter in which a microcomputer is built. • The values converted to digital values are reflected in the special data registers (DT90040 or

DT90041) and can be read in the user’s program.

<Block diagram>

Non-isolated between the FPΣ thermister input unit and the power supply connector (24V). The red leader line is connected with the 3.3V power supply and the black is connected with the Vin.

Total precision Total precision = (Total precision of AD converter in which microcomputer is built: ±5LSBNote))+(Precision of thermister) Note) ±5LSB means there is a margin of error of ±5LSB for the values (0 to 1000) converted with AD converter. Thermister resistance values and digital conversion values • Use the following formula for conversion of thermister resistance values and digital conversion values. • Digital conversion values changes within a range of K0 to K1000. 1024 X 2.2 Thermister resistance value (kΩ) = -2.2 (Digital value+12)


Usable thermister • Thermisters of which resistance values are within a range of 200Ω to 75kΩ.

Manufacturer Thermister type (B constant) Guide for Measuring range (°C)

Shibaura Electronics Co., Ltd.

3390 K -50 to +100 °C 3450 K 50 to +150 °C 4300 K +100 to +200 °C 5133 K +150 to +300 °C

Note: • The length of the wiring between the FPΣ control unit and the thermister should be less than 10m. • A thin wire (AWG28, length: 150 mm) is used for the leader line. Connect and bundle the wire without

any stress. • It is recommended to mount parts such as condensers externally if the converted value is unstable.


2.5.2 Loading of Thermister Temperature Data

Reading the value of the FPΣ special data register enables to load the analog value data that corresponds to the resistance value of the thermister. Applicable special data register

Symbol Thermister No. Special data register Digital value after conversion V0 Thermister 0 DT90040

K0 to K1000 V1 Thermister 1 DT90041

Thermister measuring temperature – A/D conversion table (example: 3450K) • Work out the temperature and the thermister resistance value from the temperature characteristic table

of the used thermister. • The converted digital values can be calculated by the formula described in the previous page.

Temperature (°C) Thermister resistance (kΩ)

Converted digital value Resolution (°C)

50 4.3560 332 0.135 60 3.1470 409 0.130 70 2.3170 487 0.128 80 1.7340 561 0.135 90 1.3180 628 0.149

100 1.0170 688 0.167 110 0.7940 740 0.192 120 0.6277 785 0.222 130 0.5017 822 0.270 140 0.4052 853 0.323 150 0.3305 878 0.400

Note) (Total precision of AD converter in which microcomputer is built: ±5LSB)+(Precision of thermister) is not included in the above digital values. Conversion program using scaling instruction (F282) • Appropriate data which interpolated from nonlinear data can be obtained by creating converted digital

values and temperature data as a data table and executing the scaling instruction (F282).

DT90040: Special data register (Digital value after thermister input conversion) DT0: Beginning of data table DT100: Converted data (temperature)

Example of data table creation

Input data (Converted digital value)

Output data (Temperature)

DT0 11 DT1 332 DT12 50 DT2 409 DT13 60 DT3 487 DT14 70

• • • • • • • •

DT11 878 DT22 150 Note) Specify (the number of data to be paired) + 1 for DT0.


2.6 Clock/Calendar Function If a backup battery is installed in the FP∑, the clock/calendar function can be used. This function cannot be used without a backup battery.

2.6.1 Area for Clock/Calendar Function

With the clock/calendar function, data indicating the hour, minute, second, day, year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs.

Special data Register No. Upper byte Lower byte Reading Writing

DT90053 Hour data

H00 to H23 Minute data H00 to H59

Available Not available

DT90054 Minute data H00 to H59

Second data H00 to H59

Available Available

DT90055 Day data

H01 to H31 Hour data

H00 to H23 Available Available

DT90056 Year data

H00 to H99 Month data H01 to H12

Available Available

DT90057 - Day-of-the-week data

H00 to H06 Available Available

2.6.2 Setting of Clock/Calendar Function

There are two ways to set the clock/calendar function, as described below. Setting using FPWIN GR 1. Press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen. 2. Select “Set PLC Date and Time” under “Tool” on the menu bar. Set PLC Date and Time dialog box

The above steps display the “Set PLC Date and Time dialog box” shown at the left. Input the date and time, and click on the “OK” button.

Setting and changing using program 1. The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057, which are allocated as the clock/calender setting area, are sent. 2. A value of H8000 is written to DT90058. Note) The value can be sent using the differential instruction “DF”, or by changing H8000 to H0000.


Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on.

Note: No values have been set in the default settings, so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values. As a day of the week is not automatically set on FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set each value for 00 to 06.

2.6.3 Example Showing the Clock/Calendar being Used

Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start

In the example shown here, the clock/calendar function is used to output the (Y0) signal for one second, at 8:30 a.m. every day. Here, the “Hour/minute” data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time.

The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits, in the BCD format. This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time (BCD), and the R900B (=flag) special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time.


2.6.4 30-second Compensation Sample Program

This is a program to perform the compensation for 30 seconds when R0 is turned ON. If the 30-second compensation is required, use this program.



Chapter 3 Expansion


3.1 Type of Expansion Unit The FPΣ expansion unit (including intelligent units) and the FP0/FP0R expansion unit (expansion I/O unit and intelligent unit) can be used with FPΣ. The FP0/FP0R expansion units are connected on the right side of the control unit, just as they were with the FP0. The FPΣ expansion units are connected to the left side of the control unit.

Note: • The FPΣ expansion unit cannot be connected to FPG-C32T, FPG-C32TTM, FPG-C32TH or FPG-

C32THTM. Only the FP0/FP0R expansion unit can be connected. • Up to 2 units of FP∑ positioning unit RTEX can be installed.


3.2 Expansion Method of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit The FP0/FP0R expansion unit (expansion I/O unit, intelligent unit) is expected by connecting to the right side of the control unit. Unit expansion is done using the right-side connector for FP0 expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit. (1) Peel the seal on the side of the unit so that the internal right-side connector for FP0 expansion is exposed.

(2) Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver.

(3) Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units.

(4) Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 2 to secure the unit.


3.3 Expansion Method of FPΣ Expansion Unit The dedicated expansion unit for FPΣ (including intelligent unit) is expanded by connecting to the left side of the control unit. Unit expansion is done using the left-side connector for FPΣ expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit. (1) Remove the cover on the left side of the unit so that the internal left-side connector for FPΣ expansion is exposed. (2) Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver.

(3) Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units.

(4) Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 2 to secure the unit.


3.4 Specifications of FPΣ Expansion Unit

3.4.1 FPΣ Expansion Unit

Parts and functions

① LED display selection switch Switches between the input (32 points) and output (32 points) of the LED display. ② Input connector (40 pins) ③ Output connector (40 pins) ④ Input and Output indicator LEDs ⑤ FPΣ expansion connector This expansion connector is used to connect the dedicated unit for FPΣ. ⑥ Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion unit. ⑦ DIN hook This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch. The lever is also used for installation on the mounting plate (slim 30 type) (Product No.:AFP0811).


Input specifications Item Description

Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC Rated input current Approx. 3.5 mA Input points per common 32 points/common

(Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal.)

Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1.3 mA Input impedance Approx. 6.8 kΩ

Response time off→on 0.2 ms or less on→off 0.3 ms or less

Operating mode indicator LED display Transistor output specifications

Item Description NPN PNP

Insulation method Optical coupler Output type Open collector Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC 24 V CD Operating load voltage range 4.75 to 26.4 V DC 21.6 to 26.4 V DC Max. load current 0.1 A Max. surge current 0.5 A Output points per common 32 points/common Off state leakage current 100 µ or less On state voltage drop 0.5 V or less

Response time off→on 0.2 ms or less on→off 0.5 ms or less

External power supply for driving internal circuit

Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC

Current 15 mA or less 30 mA or less

Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Short circuit protection Short circuit prevention, Thermal protection


Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature.

Circuit diagram


Terminal layout diagram

Note: The numbers in the connector are for the first expansion.


3.4.2 FPΣ Expansion Data Memory Unit

Parts and Functions

① POWER LED (Green) ② BATT LED (Red) Lights out: The voltage of the internal secondary battery is normal. Lights on: The voltage of the internal secondary battery decreases.

Also, the memory backup switches are off. ③ Memory backup switches The factory default setting is “OFF” so turn both SW1 and 2 “ON” when using the unit. If these switches are turned off, the memory backup is not available as the memory is separated from the internal battery. Turn them on when the unit is used. ④ Connector for FPΣ expansion This connector is used to expand the unit for FPΣ. ⑤ Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units. The hook is also used for installation on flat type mounting plate (AFP0804). ⑥ DIN hook The unit enables attachment at a touch to a DIN rail. The lever is also used for installation on slim 30 type mounting plate (AFP0811).


General specifications Item Description

Ambient temperature/humidity 0 to +55 °C, 30 to 85 %RH (at 25°C, non-condensing) Storage temperature/humidity -20 to +70 °C, 30 to 85 %RH (at 25°C, non-condensing)

Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1 cycle/min, double amplitude of 0.75 mm, 10 min on 3 axes

Shock resistance Shock of 98 m/s2, 4 times on 3 axes

Noise immunity 1000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1µs (based on in-house measurements

Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Weight Approx. 80 g

Performance specifications

Item Description Memory 256 k words (1k word x 256 banks) Battery life 5 years or more Consumption current (5V) 100 mA or less No of occupied I/O points Input 16 points

Data organization This unit is organized with 256 banks (1 k word = 1 bank). Banks are assigned with numbers which are from “0” to “FF” in hexadecimal. Each bank is assigned with an address for every word, and one bank is organized with 1024 words (1k word) of a range within 0 to 3FF (0 to 1023 for decimal address). Specify the above bank No. H0 to HFF (hexadecimal) and address (K0 to K1023) for reading data from the control unit to this unit.


How to access the memory unit The following instructions are used to access the expansion data memory unit to the control unit. 1. To read data from the expansion data memory unit to the control unit S1: The area for specifying the slot No. of an Intelligent I/O unit (this unit) and bank numbers Specify them in hexadecimal.

Higher byte Lower byte Bank No. H0 to HFF Slot No. H0 to H3

S2: The first address (word address), K0 to K1023 (H0 to H3FF), for reading the memory of an intelligent I/O unit (this unit) The area for specifying addresses in the bank specified in S1 n: No. of words to read, K1 to K1024 (H1 to H400) D: The first area No. to store read data [Example]

When R0 is on, 10 words will be read from the address K500 of the bank No. H50 in the expansion data memory unit installed in the slot No. 03 to store DT100 to DT109 in order. 2. To write data to the expansion data memory unit from the control unit S1: The area for specifying the slot No. of an Intelligent I/O unit (this unit) and bank numbers Specify them in hexadecimal.

Higher byte Lower byte Bank No. H0 to HFF Slot No. H0 to H3

S2: The first area No. of write data n: No. of words to write, K1 to K1024 (H1 to H400) D: The first area No. to store write data [Example]

When R0 is on, the contents of DT10, 11, 12 and higher are written for 10 words in order in the area starting with the address H2FE of the bank No. HAB in the expansion data memory unit installed in the slot No. H01.


Note: • The operating time for the instructions is as follows.

F150 READ : 16.19+(0.84 x No. of words to read) µs F151 WRITE : 17.88+(0.77 x No. of words to write) µs

• If all areas are read and written in one scan, the scanning time may be over. • If you try to READ/WRITE data in multiple addresses in one scan, arrange the instructions using the

above operating time as a guide. Battery error When any error occurs in a backup battery, the input will be turned on as follows. [Example] When installing in the expansion unit 1 (slot No. 0)

X100 OFF Battery voltage is normal.

ON The battery voltage for memory backup decreased. Or the memory backup SW is off.

BATT LED (Red) Lights out Battery voltage is normal.

Lights The battery voltage for memory backup decreased. Or the memory backup SW is off.

Note: • If an error with a battery is detected, backup the data within one month and replace the unit with a new

one.


Chapter 4 I/O Allocation


4.1 I/O Allocation

Regarding I/O number • Specifying X and Y numbers On the FPΣ and the FP0, the same numbers are used for input and output.

• Expression of numbers for input/output relays Since input relay “X” and output relay “Y” are handled in units of 16 points, they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below.

• Slot No. Slot No. is the number indicating the installing position of the expansion unit which is used to generate programs by some FPΣ expansion unit.


4.2 Allocation of FPΣ Control Unit

4.2.1 I/O Number of FPΣ Control Unit

The I/O allocation of FPΣ control unit is fixed. Type of control unit Number of allocation I/O number

FPG-C32T/FPG-C32TTM FPG-C32T2/FPG-C32T2TM FPG-C32TH/FPG-C32THTM

Input (16 points) X0 to XF

Output (16 points) Y0 to YF

FPG-C28P2/FPG-C28P2TM FPG-C28P2H/FPG-C28P2HTM

Input (16 points) X0 to XF Output (16 points) Y0 to YB

FPG-C24R2/FPG-C24R2TM FPG-C24R2H/FPG-C24R2HTM

Input (16 points) X0 to XF Output (8 points) Y0 to Y7


4.3 Allocation of FPΣ Expansion Unit The FPΣ expansion unit is installed on the left side of the FPΣ control unit. The I/O numbers of the FPΣ expansion unit start with the lowest number at the right and proceed in sequential order.

4.3.1 I/O Numbers of FPΣ Expansion Unit

• I/O do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added. • The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.

Type of unit Number of allocation

Expansion unit 1 Slot 0




FPΣ Expansion unit

FPG-XY64D2T

Input 32 points

- X100 to X11F

X180 to X19F

X260 to X27F

X340 to X35F

Output 32 points

- Y100 to Y11F

Y180 to Y19F

Y260 to Y27F

Y340 to Y35F

FPΣ Positioning unit

1-axis type FPG-PP11 FPG-PP12

Input 16 points

1st axis

X100 to X10F

X180 to X18F

X260 to X26F

X340 to X34F

Output 16 points

Y100 to Y10F

Y180 to Y18F

Y260 to Y26F

Y340 to Y34F

2-axis type FPG-PP21 FPG-PP22

Input 32 points

1st axis X100 to X10F

X180 to X18F

X260 to X26F

X340 to X34F

2nd axis X110 to X11F

X190 to X19F

X270 to X27F

X350 to X35F

Output 32 points

1st axis Y100 to Y10F

Y180 to Y18F

Y260 to Y26F

Y340 to Y34F

2nd axis Y110 to Y11F

Y190 to Y19F

Y270 to Y27F

Y350 to Y35F

FPΣ Expansion data memory unit

FPG-EM1 Input 16 points

Battery error

X100 to X10F

X180 to X18F

X260 to X26F

X340 to X34F

FPΣ S-LINK unit

FPG-SL Input -

X100 to X17F

X180 to X25F

X260 to X33F

X340 to X41F

Output - Y100 to Y17F

Y180 to Y25F

Y260 to Y33F

Y340 to Y41F

FPΣ Positioning unit RTEX Note)

FPG-PN2AN 2-axis type FPG-PN4AN 4-axis type FPG-PN8AN 8-axis type

Input 128 points

- X100 to X17F

X180 to X25F

X260 to X33F

X340 to X41F

Output 128 points

- Y100 to Y17F

Y180 to Y25F

Y260 to Y33F

Y340 to Y41F

• Regarding FPΣ CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual. Note) There is no restriction on installed positions, however, the number of installed units is up to 2 units.


4.4 Allocation of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit The FP0/FP0R expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FPΣ control unit. The I/O numbers start with the lowest number at the expansion unit nearest the control unit and proceed in sequential order.

4.4.1 I/O Numbers of FP0/FP0R Expansion Unit

• I/O do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added. • The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.

Type of unit Number of allocation

Expansion unit 1

Expansion unit 2

Expansion unit 3

FP0/FP0R Expansion unit

E8X Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67

E8R Input (4 points) X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output (4 points) Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63

E8TY/P E8YR Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67

E16X Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F E16R E16T/P

Input (8 points) X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Output (8 points) Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67

E16YT/P Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F

E32T/P Input (16 points) X20 to X2F X40 to X4F Y60 to Y6F Output (16 points) Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F

FP0 Analog I/O unit

FP0-A21

Input (16 points) CH0

WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)

Input (16 points) CH1

WX3 (X30 to X3F)

WX5 (X50 to X5F)

WX7 (X70 to X7F)

Output (16 points) WY2 (Y20 to Y2F)

WY4 (Y40 to Y4F)

WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)

FP0 A/D conversion unit FP0 thermocouple unit

FP0-A80 FP0-TC4 FP0-TC8

Input (16 points) CH0, 2, 4, 6

WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)

Input (16 points) CH1, 3, 5, 7

WX3 (X30 to X3F)

WX5 (X50 to X5F)

WX7 (X70 to X7F)

FP0 RTD unit FP0-RTD6

Input (16 points) CH0, 2, 4

WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)


WX3 (X30 to X3F)

WX5 (X50 to X5F)

WX7 (X70 to X7F)


WY4 (Y40 to Y4F)

WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)

FP0 D/A conversion unit

FP0-A04V FP0-A04I

Input (16 points) WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)

Output (16 points) CH0, 2

WY2 (Y20 to Y2F)

WY4 (Y40 to Y4F)

WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)

Output (16 points) CH1, 3

WY3 (Y30 to Y3F)

WY5 (Y50 to Y5F)

WY7 Y70 to Y7F)

FP0 I/O link unit FP0-IOL Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F

Output 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F • The data for the each channels of FP0 A/D conversion unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-

TC4/FP0-TC8), FP0 RTD unit(FP0-RTD6) and FP0 D/A conversion unit (FP0-A04V/FP0-A04I) is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data.

• Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.



Chapter 5 Installation and Wiring


5.1 Installation

5.1.1 Installation Environment and Space

Operating environment (Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing) -Ambient temperatures:0 ~ +55 -Ambient humidity: 30% to 85% RH (at 25°C, non-condensing) -Keep the height below 2000m. -For use in pollution Degree 2 environment. -Do not use it in the following environments. - Direct sunlight - Sudden temperature changes causing condensation. - Inflammable or corrosive gas. -Excessive airborne dust, metal particles or saline matter. - Benzine, paint thinner, alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda. -Direct vibration, shock or direct drop of water. - Influence from power transmission lines, high voltage equipment, power cables, power equipment, radio transmitters, or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges.(100mm or more) Static electricity - Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage. - Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product. Measures regarding heat discharge • Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the

generation of heat.

• Do not install the FPΣ control unit as shown below.

• Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters, transformers or large scale resistors.


Installation space • Leave at least 50mm/1.97 in. of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow

heat radiation and unit replacement.

• Maintain at least 100mm/3.937 in. of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and

heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit.

• Leave at least 100mm/3.937 in. of space open from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow

room for programming tool connections and wiring.


5.1.2 Installation and Removal

Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail FPΣ unit can be simply attached to DIN rail. Procedure of installation method (1) Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail. (2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position.

Procedure of removal method (1) Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever. (2) Pull the attachment lever downwards. (3) Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail.


5.1.3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate

When using the slim 30 type mounting plate (AFP0811) (for mounting FPΣ) Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the slim 30 type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below.

The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails.

When using the slim type mounting plate (AFP0803) (for mounting FP0) Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below.

The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails.


Note) The procedure for the removal is the same as AFP0811.

Note: When using an expansion unit, tighten the screws after joining all of the slim type mounting plate to be connected. Tighten the screws at each of the four corners. [Example] When using the maximum numbers of the expansion units (with AFP0811, AFP0803)


When using the flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) Use M4 size pan-head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below.

Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of the unit. Align the expansion hooks with the mounting plate and press the hooks on the top and bottom.

An unit with an attached flat type mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail.

Note: The flat type mounting plate (AFP0804) should be used only with the control unit as a stand-alone unit. It should not be used when the control unit is being used in combination with an FP0 expansion unit or FPΣ expansion unit.


5.2 Wiring of Power Supply

5.2.1 Wiring of Power Supply

Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable (Product No.:AFPG805) that comes with the unit to connect the power supply. Brown: 24V DC Blue: 0V Green: Function earth Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise, twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable. Power supply type • To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line, use an insulated power

supply with an internal protective circuit. • The regulator on the unit is a non-insulated type. • If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit, always make sure power is

supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse. Power supply voltage Rated voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC


Wiring system Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit, input/output devices, and mechanical power apparatus.

Measures regarding power supply sequence (start up sequence) • The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the

input/output power supplies. • If the input/output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit, the control unit will

detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation. • Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply, and turn

the power on and off simultaneously for both.


5.2.2 Grounding

In situations of excess noise Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in situations of excess noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression. Exclusive grounding • The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Ω. • The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible. The ground wire should be as

short as possible. • If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive

ground for each device.

Note: Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used, grounding may cause problems. [Example] Since the power supply line of the FPΣ power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor, if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth, the varistor may be shorted.

Do not ground the FPΣ function earth terminal when grounding a plus (+) terminal of the power. In some computers, the SG terminal of RS232C port and connector shielding are connected. Also the FPΣ tool port shielding is connected with the function earth terminal. Therefore, the GND terminal of FPΣ and the function earth terminal are connected if the computer is connected. Especially when the FPΣ is connected to a computer with a plus (+) terminal grounded, therefore, an FPΣ’s minus (-) terminal is connected with the function earth terminal. As a result, short circuit occurs which may lead to the breakage of FPΣ and its neighboring parts.


5.3 Wiring of Input and Output

5.3.1 Input Wiring

Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type NPN open collector output type

Voltage output type Two-wire output type

Precaution when using LED-equipped reed switch

When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED-equipped reed switch, make sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 21.6V DC. In particular, take care when connecting a number of switches in series.

Precaution when using two-wire type sensor

If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two-wire type sensor “photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor”, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below. The formula is based on an input impedance of 5.6kΩ. The input impedance varies depending on the input terminal number.


Precaution when using LED-equipped limit switch

If the input of PLC does not turn off because of the leakage current from the LED-equipped limit switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended, as shown below.


5.3.2 Output Wiring

Protective circuit for inductive loads • With an inductive load, a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load. • When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type, be sure to connect a diode across the ends

of the load. When using an AC inductive load

When using a DC inductive load

Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in-rush currents, to minimize their effect, connect a protection circuit as shown below.

About the short-circuit protective circuit To prevent the output circuit from being damaged by a short-circuit or other electrical problems on the output side, a transistor with short-circuit protection is provided. (Excluding the Y0, 1, 3, 4 of the FPΣ control unit and the FP0 expansion unit)


5.3.3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings

• Be sure to select the thickness (dia.) of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity.

• Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated, and these wirings are separated from the power wiring, as much as possible. Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together.

• Separate the input/output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm/3.937 in.


5.4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type Supplied connector and suitable wires The connector listed below is supplied with the FPΣ control unit. Use the suitable wires given below. Also, use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires.

Suitable wires

Size Nominal cross-sectional area

Insulation thickness Remark Rated

current AWG#22 0.3mm2

Dia. 1.5 to dia. 1.1 Twisted wire of 12 pcs/0.18

3A AWG#24 0.2mm2 Twisted wire

Note) The contact suitable for AWG#22 or AWG#24 is supplied with the product. For purchasing a contact suitable for AWG#26 or AWG#28, specify AFP7231FP. Supplied connector (Attached to FPΣ control unit)

Manufacturer Component parts Required quantity

Manufactured by us Housing(10P) 2 pcs x 2sets Semi-cover(10P) 4 pcs x 2sets Contact(for AW22 and 24)5 pins 4 pcs x 2sets

Note) The parts of the number of the connectors are supplied with the product. If you need more connectors, purchase AFP0807 (2 sets/pack). Supplied connector (Attached to FPΣ expansion unit)

Manufacturer Component parts Required quantity

Manufactured by us Housing(40P) 1 pc x 2sets Semi-cover(40P) 2 pcs x 2sets Contact(for AW22 and 24)5 pins 8 pcs x 2sets

Note) The parts of the number of the connectors are supplied with the product. If you need more connectors, purchase AFP2801 (2 sets/pack). Pressure connection tool

Manufacturer Product No. Manufactured by us AXY52000FP

Key Point: When using a MIL connector for flat cables, purchase the product number AFP0808 (4 pcs, 10-pin strain-relief with key). In this case, the suitable wire is AWG#28 and the rated current is 1A.


Procedure of assembly (Wiring method) The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire’s insulation, saving labor. (1) Bend the welder (contact) back from the carrier, and set it in the pressure connection tool.

(2) Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops, and lightly grip the tool.

(3) After press-fitting the wire, insert it into the housing.

(4) When all wires has been inserted, fit the semi-cover into place.

If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure-connected, the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact.

Key Point: If using a MIL connector for flat cables, specify the product No. AXM110915. In this case, the suitable wire is AWG#28 and the rated current is 1A.


5.5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type A screw-down connection type for terminal block is used. The suitable wires are given below.

Terminal block socket

Item Description Number of pin 9 pins Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co. Model No. MC1,5/9-ST-3,5 Product No. 1840434

Suitable wires

Size Nominal cross-sectional area AWG #24 to 16 0.2 to 1.25mm2

Pole terminal If a pole terminal is being used, the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co. should be used.

Manufacturer Cross-sectional area (mm2)

Size Part No. With insulating sleeve

Without insulating sleeve

Phoenix Contact Co.

0.25 AWG #24 AI 0,25 – 6 BU A 0,25 – 7 0.34 AWG #22 AI 0.34 – 6 TQ A 0,34 – 7 0.50 AWG #20 AI 0,5 – 6 WH A 0,5 – 6 0.75 AWG #18 AI 0,75 – 6 GY A 0,75 – 6 1.00 AWG #18 – A 1 – 60 0.5×2 AWG #20 (for 2

pcs) AI – TWIN 2× 0.5 – 8 WH

–

Pressure welding tool for pole terminals

Manufacturer Part No. Product No. Phoenix Contact Co. CRIMPFOX 6 1212034

For tightening the terminal block When tightening the terminals of the terminal block, use a screwdriver (Product No. 1205037) with a blade size of 0.4 × 2.5 (Part No. SZS 0,4×2,5). The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 N･m (2.3 to 2.5 kgf･cm) or less.


Wiring method (1) Remove a portion of the wire’s insulation.

(2) Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket, and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place. (Tightening torque: 0.22 N·m to 0.25 N·m (2.3 kgf·cm to 2.5 kgf·cm))

Note: • When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire. • Do not twist the wires to connect them. • Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration. • After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire. • In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire closes upon counter-clockwise rotation, the

connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the wire.


5.6 Safety Measures

5.6.1 Safety Measures

Precautions regarding system design In certain applications, malfunction may occur for the following reasons: • Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input/output or mechanical power apparatus. • Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs. • Abnormality in the PLC unit, external power supply, or other devices. In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed in the following: Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise/counter-clockwise operation is controlled, provide an interlock circuit externally. Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device. Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized. To keep this sequence, the following measures are recommended: • Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG. mode, and then switch to the RUN mode. • Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized.

Note) In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also, have the input/output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating.

Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching, such as inverters, do not ground them together. Use an exclusive ground for each device.

5.6.2 Momentary Power Failures

Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 3 ms, the FPΣ continues to operate. If the power is off for 3 ms or longer, operation changes depending on the combination of units, the power supply voltage, and other factors. (In some cases, operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset.)


5.6.3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections

Power supply An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used. The power supply for the control unit operation is a non-insulated circuit, so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied, the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed. If using a power supply without a protective circuit, power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse. Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device, a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally.


5.7 Handling of Backup Battery

5.7.1 What Backup Battery Does

Install an optional backup battery when the hold area is insufficient in the initial state or for using the clock/calender function. Areas backed up with the battery

Classification Hold area when battery is not installed

Hold area when battery is installed

Operation memory

Timer and counter C1008 - C1023

Hold areas or non-hold areas can be specified arbitrarily by setting the system registers No.6 to No.13 using a programming tool. (All points can be also held.)

Timer and counter Elapsed value area

EV1008 - EV1023

Internal relay 12k type: R900 – R97F 32k type: R2480-R255F

Data register DT32710 – DT32764 Step ladder None Link relay None Link register None

Special data register

Clock/calender None All points

Type of backup batteries (Sold separately)

Appearance Product name Specifications Product No.

Backup battery for FPΣ With a connector AFPG804

High-capacity battery folder for FPΣ

Battery folder with a connector Purchase a commercial battery CR123A separately.

AFPG807 (Folder only)


5.7.2 Settings of Battery Error Alarm and Hold Area

Setting of the battery error alarm - Setting the battery error alarm enables you to monitor the remaining backup battery level. By default,

the battery error alarm is set to off in the system register settings. For using the battery, check the box of the system register No.4 "Alarm Battery Error" of the control unit.

Settings of Hold area/Non-hold area - The settings of the operation memory area such as data registers and system registers No.6 to No.14

are necessary.

Note: - When "Battery Error Alarm" is not set, the ERR.LED will not flash even if a battery error is detected.

Note that data may be lost as the result of the battery shutoff. - The setting of the system registers Nos. 6 to 14 are effective only when the backup battery is installed. - Without the battery, use at the default settings. If changing the settings, the “Hold/Non-hold” operation

becomes unstable.


5.7.3 Replacement of Backup Battery

The procedure for replacing the backup battery is as follows. Procedure 1. Supply power to the control unit for more than one minute. Charge the built-in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the battery. 1. Turn off the power supply. Remove the battery cover using a tool such as a screwdriver.

4. Remove the used battery. 5. Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power of the control unit. Connect the connector, and place the battery between two tabs.

6. Install the expansion cover.

Note: - If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery, retained memory

data may be lost.


5-24

Replacement procedure (for high-capacity battery folder for FP AFPG807 and commercial battery CR123A) 1. Supply power to the control unit for more than one minute. Charge the built-in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the battery. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Remove the used battery. 4. Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power of the control unit.

Note: - If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery, retained memory

data may be lost. Precaution when using FP high-capacity battery folder AFPG807 - Do not touch the terminals of the folder and connector pins directly to prevent electrostatic discharge

failure. Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product. Make sure that the parts such as the lead wires and connector parts are not stressed when and after installing it.

- Use M3-flat head screws or a double-faced tape for mounting the folder. - The connector to connect with the FP does not have a lock mechanism. Fix the lead wire to prevent

the connector from dropping off.

(Installation illustration) - Install the battery cover pulling out a lead wire through the gap between the control unit and the battery

cover.

Installed state of battery cover

(Dimensions of battery folder AFG807)

100 ±2020.5

43.9

25.4

16.5


5.7.4 Lifetime and Time for Replacement of Backup Battery

Battery lifetime

Type of backup battery Battery lifetime Suggested replacement interval

When using a backup battery for FPΣ (AFPG804) 220 days or more 1 year

When using a commercial battery CR123A and FPΣ high-capacity battery folder (AFPG807)

6 years or more 6 years

Note1) The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied. Note2) Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions. Note3) The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied. The lifetime is about twice as long as that when no power is supplied. Detection of battery error and time for replacement - Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops. Create a program to

announce errors to the outside as necessary. Two seconds after starting supplying power, the battery voltage is checked. Therefore, an error is not announced in the first scan.

- When the system register No.4 "Battery Error Alarm" is enabled, the ERR.LED of the control unit will flash.

- Although data will be retained for about a week after the detection of battery error without power, the battery should be replaced as soon as possible.

Note: - if a week has passed without power after the special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turned on or the

ERR.LED flashed, retained memory data may be lost. - Regardless of how much time has passed after the detection of battery error, supply power to the

control unit for more than one minute when replacing the battery. - Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will be on when a battery error is detected regardless of the

setting of system register No.4.



Chapter 6 High-speed counter, Pulse Output and

PWM Output functions


6.1 Overview of Each Functions

6.1.1 Three Functions that Use Built-in High-speed Counter

There are three functions available when using the high-speed counter built into the FPΣ. High-speed counter function

The high-speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders. When the count reaches the target value, this function turns on/off the desired output.

Pulse output function

Combined with a commercially available motor driver, the function enables positioning control. With the exclusive instruction, you can perform trapezoidal control, home return, and JOG operation.

PWM output function

By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio.


6.1.2 Performance of Built-in High-speed Counter

Number of Channel • There are four channels for the built-in high-speed counter • The channel number allocated for the high-speed counter will change depending on the function being

used. Counting range • K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary) • The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the

maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.

Note: When the linear interpolation instruction F175 or the circular interpolation instruction F176 is used, the value for the target value or the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below. -8,388,608 to +8,388,607 (Coded 24-bit binary) The F175 and F176 instructions can be used only with the C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H control units.


6.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items

6.2.1 Specifications

High-speed counter function

High-speed counter channel No.

Input/output contact No. being used

Memory area being used Performance specifications

Input contact number (value in

parenthesis is reset

input) Note1)

Control flag

Elapsed value area

Target value area

Mini-mum input pulse width Note2)

Maximum counting speed

[Single phase] Incremental, Decremental

CH0 X0

(X2) R903A

DT90044 to DT90045

DT90046 to DT90047

10µs (100µs)

Using 1 channel: Max. 50kHz (x1-ch) Using 2 channels: Max. 30kHz (x2-ch) Using 3 channels: Max. 20kHz (x3-ch) Using 4 channels: Max. 20kHz (x4-ch)

CH1 X1

(X2) R903B

DT90048 to DT90049

DT90050 to DT90051

CH2 X3

(X5) R903C

DT90200 to DT90201

DT90202 to DT90203

CH3 X4

(X5) R903D

DT90204 to DT90205

DT90206 to DT90207

[2-phase] 2-phase input One input, Direction distinction

CH0 X0 X1

(X2) R903A

DT90044 to DT90045

DT90046 to DT90047 25µs

(100µs)

Using 1 channel: Max. 20kHz (x1-ch) Using 2 channels: Max. 15kHz (x2-ch)

CH2 X3 X4

(X5) R903C

DT90200 to DT90201

DT90202 to DT90203

Related instructions: F0(MV) :High-speed counter control F1(DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter F166(HC1S) :Target value match on (Specify the desired output from Y0 to Y7 using instruction) F167(CH1R) :Target value match off (Specify the desired output from Y0 to Y7 using instruction)

Note1) Reset input X2 can be set to either CH0 or CH1. Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3.

Note2) Reference: For information on minimum input pulse width,

see <6.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width>.


Pulse output function

High-speed counter

channel No.

Input/output contact number used Memory area used

CW or

pulse output

CCW or

dire-ction output

Devi-ation coun-

ter clear output

Home input

Near home input Note4)

Con- trol flag

Elapsed value area

Target value area

Indepen-dence

CH0 Y0 Y1 Y2 X2 DT9005

2 <bit4>

R903A DT90044 to DT90045

DT90046 to DT90047

CH2 Y3 Y4 Y5 X5 DT9005

2 <bit4>

R903C DT90020 to DT90201

DT90202 to DT90203

Inter-polation

Li-near

Y0 Y3

Y1 Y4

Y2 Y5

Note3)

X2 X5

Note3)

DT90052

<bit4>

R903A R903C

DT90044 to DT90045

DT90200 to DT90201

DT90046 to DT90047

DT90202 to DT90203

Cir-cular

Y0 Y3

Y1 Y4

Y2 Y5

Note3)

X2 X5

Note3)

DT90052

<bit4>

R903A R903C R904E R904F

DT90044 to DT90045

DT90200 to DT90201

DT90046 to DT90047

DT90202 to DT90203

Max. output frequency - Using one ch: Max. 100 kHz (x1-ch) - Using two chs: Max. 60 kHz (x2-ch) -Using linear interpolation: Max. 100 kHz - Using circular interpolation: Max. 20 kHz Related instructions F0 (MV) :high-speed counter control F1 (DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter F171 (SPDH) :trapezoidal control/home return F172 (PLSH) :JOG operation F174 (SP0H) :Data table control F175 (SPSH) :Linear interpolation control F176 (SPCH) :circular interpolation control

Note1) The pulse output function is only available with the transistor output type. Note2) Linear and circular interpolation control is only available with the C32T2 or C28P2 units. Note3) The home return operation of the interpolation axes should be performed for every channel.

Note4) Reference: For DT90052, see <6.4.4 Pulse Output Control Instruction (F0) (F1)>.

PWM output function

High-speed

counter channel

No.

Output contact

No. used

Memory area used Output frequency

(duty) Related instructions Control flag

CH0 Y0 R903A -When resolution = 1000, 1.5 Hz to 12.5 kHz (0.0 to 99.9%) -When resolution = 100, 15.6 kHz to 41.7 kHz (0 to 99%)

F0(MV) (High-speed counter control) F1(DMV) (Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter) F173(PWMH) (PWM output)

CH2 Y3 R903C

Note) The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type.


6.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions

Restrictions on channels/maximum counting speed (frequency) The same channel cannot be used by more than one function. The maximum frequency when using the high-speed counter and pulse output function is determined by the combination, as shown in the table below.

A: Available

Channel being used Max. counting speed (frequency) [kHz]

High-speed counter Pulse output High-speed counter Pulse output

Single phase 2-phase Independence Interpo-lation

Single phase

2-phase

Inde-pen-

dence

Inter-pola-tion CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH0 CH2 CH0 CH2

A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50

A A 30 A A 30 A A 30 A A 30 A A 30 A A 30

A A A 20 A A A 20 A A A 20 A A A 20 A 20 A A 20 15 A A 20 15 A A A 20 15 A 20

A A 20 15 A A 20 15

A A A 20 15 A A 15 A 100

A

Note3) A 30 60

A

Note3) A A 20 45

A A A A 20 30 A A 15 45 A A A 20 15 30 A 100

A

Note3) A 30 60

A A

Note3) A 20 45

A A A A 20 30 A A 15 45 A A A 20 15 30


A: Available

Channel being used Max. counting speed (frequency) [kHz]

High-speed counter Pulse output High-speed counter Pulse output

Single phase 2-phase Independence Interpo-lation

Single phase

2-phase

Inde-pen-

dence

Inter-pola-tion CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH0 CH2 CH0 CH2

A Note1)

A Note1) 60

A

Note3) A A 20 45

A

Note3) A A 20 45

A

Note3) A

Note3) A A 20 30

Linear 100 Note2)

Linear 80

A

Note3) Linear 20 60

A

Note3) Linear 20 60

A

Note3) A

Note3) Linear 20 45

Circular 20

A

Note3) Circular 20 20

A


A

Note3) A


Note1)If two channels are not executed simultaneously, each axis may be used up to 100 kHz. Note2)These are the values when PC link and fixed-interval interrupt function are not used. Note3)When using CH0 pulse output, do not use the hard reset (X2) at CH0 and CH1 of HSC. When using CH2 pulse output, do not use the hard reset (X5) at CH2 and CH3 of HSC. Restrictions on I/O allocations • The inputs and outputs allocated to the various functions listed in the table in the previous section

“6.2.1” cannot be allocated to more than one function. • Except for the examples noted below, inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various

functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs. Example 1: If no reset input is used in the high-speed counter function, X2 and X5 can be as normal inputs. Example 2: If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function, Y2 and Y5 can be used as normal outputs. Restrictions on the execution of related instructions (F166 to F176) • If an instruction related to the high-speed counter “F166 to F176” is executed, the control flag (special

internal relay: R903A to R903D) corresponding to the channel used turns on.


• Please be aware that the control flag “in progress” may change while a scan is being carried out. To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay, you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.

• When the control flag for a channel turns on, another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed.

• Executing circular interpolation control instruction F176 sets the circular interpolation in progress flag (special internal relay: R904E), and that state is maintained until the target value is achieved. During this time, other pulse output instructions (F171 to F176) cannot be executed.


6.2.3 Booting Time

The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output. Type of instruction Booting time

Pulse output instruction F171 (SPDH) Trapezoidal control/home return

CW/CCW is set : Pulse/direction is set :

Approx. 200 µs (with 30 steps) Approx. 400 µs (with 60 steps) Approx. 500 µs (with 30 steps) Note) Approx. 700 µs (with 60 steps) Note)

Pulse output instruction F172 (PLSH) JOG operation


Approx. 20 µs Approx. 320 µs Note)

Pulse output instruction F174 (SP0H) Data table control


Approx. 30 µs Approx. 330 µs Note)

PWM output instruction F173 (PWMH)

Approx. 30 µs

Note) If pulse/direction is set, a waiting time (approx. 300 µs) is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed.


6.3 High-speed Counter Function

6.3.1 Overview of High-speed Counter Function

• The high-speed counter function counts the input signals, and when the count reaches the target value, turns on and off the desired output.

• To turn on an output when the target value is matched, use the target value match ON instruction F166 (HC1S). To turn off an output, use the target value match OFF instruction F167 (HC1R).

• Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET/RET instruction. Setting the system register In order to use the high-speed counter function, it is necessary to set system register numbers nos. 400 and 401.

6.3.2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode Decremental input mode

Two-phase input mode Incremental/decremental input mode

Direction discrimination


Count for reset input (Incremental input mode)

The reset input is executed by the interruption at (1) on (edge) and (2) off (edge). (1) on (edge) … Count disable, Elapsed value clear (2) off (edge) … Count enable DT90052 (bit2): “able/disable” setting of the input can be set by the reset input.

6.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width

For the period T (1/frequency), a minimum input pulse width of T/2 (single-phase input) or T/4 (two-phase input) is required. <Single phase> <Two-phase>


6.3.4 I/O Allocation

• As shown in the table in the previous section “6.2.1”, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used.

• The output turned on and off can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R). When using CH0 with incremental input and reset input

When using CH0 with two-phase input and reset input

* The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired.

* The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from Y0 to Y7 as desired.

6.3.5 Instructions used with High-speed Counter Function

High-speed counter control instruction (F0) • This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable. • Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052. • Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again. Operations that can be performed with this instruction • Counter software reset (bit0) • Counting operation enable/disable (bit1) • Hardware reset enable/disable (bit2) • Clear high-speed counter instructions F166 to F176 • Clear target value match interrupt Example: Performing a software reset In case of CH0

In the above program, the reset is performed in step (1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed.

In case of CH1


High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FPΣ

• The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure.

• Control codes written with an F0 (MV) instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193.

Note) In the reset input setting, the reset input (X2 or X5) allocated in the high-speed counter setting of the system registers are defined to “enable/disable”.


Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1) • This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter. • Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90044. • The elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and

DT90045. • Use this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value. Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value of K3000 in the high-speed counter.

Example 2: Reading the elapsed value

Read the elapsed value of the high-speed counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101.

Target value match ON instruction (F166) Example 1:

If the elapsed value (DT90044 and DT90045) for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns on.

Example 2:

If the elapsed value (DT90200 and DT90201) for channel 2 matches K20000, output Y6 turns on.

Target value match OFF instruction (F167) Example 1:

If the elapsed value (DT90048 and DT90049) for channel 1 matches K30000, output Y4 turns off.

Example 2:

If the elapsed value (DT90204 and DT90205) for channel 3 matches K40000, output Y5 turns off.


6.3.6 Sample program

Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example

Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description X0 Encoder input X5 Operation start signal Y0 Inverter operation signal

R100 Positioning operation running R101 Positioning operation start R102 Positioning done pulse

R903A High-speed counter CH0 control flag

Program When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90044 and DT90045) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.


Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example

Operation chart I/O allocation

I/O No. Description X0 Encoder input X5 Operation start signal Y0 Inverter operation signal Y1 Inverter high-speed signal

R100 Positioning operation running R101 Positioning operation start R102 Arrival at deceleration point R103 Positioning done pulse

R900C Comparison instruction <flag>

R903A High-speed counter CH0 control flag


Program When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90044 and DT90045) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.


6.4 Pulse Output Function

6.4.1 Overview of Pulse Output Function

Instructions used and controls Together with a commercially available pulse-string input type motor driver, the pulse output function can be used for positioning control.

Type of control Exclusive

instru-ction

Description Usable unit

Trapezoidal control F171 (SPDH)

Provides trapezoidal (table-shaped) control for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed, maximum speed, acceleration/deceleration time and target value. C32T

C32T2 C28P2 C32TH C32T2H C28P2H

Home return Enables automatic home return operation.

JOG operation F172 (PLSH)

Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is on. A target value can also be set, so that pulse output stops at the point when the target value is matched.

Data table control F174 (SP0H)

Enables positioning control in accordance with the data table.

Linear interpolation F175 (SPSH)

Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control, by specifying the composite speed, the acceleration/deceleration time, and the target value. C32T2

C28P2 C32T2H C28P2H Circular interpolation F176

(SPCH)

The user can select one of two circular forming methods, one by specifying the pass positions and the other by specifying a center position. Pulses are output using circular interpolation control, by specifying the various parameters.

Note: • The thermister input type for various units is included. • The pulse output function can be used with the transistor output type only. Setting the system register When using the pulse output function, set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to “Do not use high-speed counter”.


6.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method

Control is carried out using two pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse.

Pulse/direction output method (forward: OFF/reverse: ON)

Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on/off signals. In this mode, forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is OFF.

Pulse/direction output method (forward: ON/reverse: OFF)

Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on/off signals. In this mode, forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signals is ON.


Operation mode Incremental <Relative value control> Outputs the pulses set with the target value. Selected Mode Target value

CW/CCW Pulse and direction

forward OFF/ reverse ON

Pulse and direction forward ON/ reverse OFF

HSC counting Method

Positive Pulse output from CW

Pulse output when direction output is OFF

Pulse output when direction output is ON

Incremental

Negative Pulse output from CCW



Decremental

Example: When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000. Absolute <Absolute value control> Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value. Selected Mode Target value

CW/CCW Pulse and direction

forward OFF/ reverse ON

Pulse and direction forward ON/ reverse OFF

HSC counting method

Target value greater than current value

Pulse output from CW



Incremental

Target value less than current value

Pulse output from CCW



Decremental

Example: When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 1000. Home return • When executing the F171 (SPDH) instruction, the pulse is continuously output until the home input (X2

or X5) is enabled. • To decelerate the movement when near the home position, designate a near home input and set bit 4

of special data register DT90052 to off → on → off. • The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed. JOG operation • Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the ON

state. Also, the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched. • The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction.


6.4.3 I/O Allocation Double pulse input driver (CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method) • Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”. • The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used. • Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”. <When using CH0> <When using CH2>

* X3 or any other input can be specified for the near home input.


Single pulse input driver (pulse input and directional switching input method) • One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output. • The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by

the channel used. • Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the <bit4> of

special data register DT90052. • Up to two driver systems can be connected. <When using CH0> <When using CH2>



Reference: <6.2.1 Table of Specifications>


6.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1) Pulse output control instruction (F0) • This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and

setting and resetting the near home input. • Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052. • Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again. Example 1: Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration. In case of CH0

In these programs, the near home input is enabled in step (1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2) to perform the preset operations. In case of CH2

Example 2: Performing a forced stop of the pulse output. In case of CH0

The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs.

In case of CH2


Key Point: : High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FPΣ

• The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure.

• Control codes written with an F0 (MV) instruction are stored by channel in special data register DT90190 and DT90192.

Note) The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the pulse output is stopped by the “Continue/stop of pulse output”. After the pulse output stops, execute the home return.

Reference: <6.2.1 Table of specifications> for information on the special data register.

Elapsed value write and read instruction (F1) • This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built-in high-speed counter. • Specify this F1 (DMV) instruction together with the special data register DT90044. • The elapsed value is stored as 32-bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90044 and

DT90045. • Use only this F1 (DMV) instruction to set the elapsed value. Example 1: Writing the elapsed value

Set the initial value of K3000 in the high-speed counter.

Reading the elapsed value

Reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter to DT100 and DT101.


Wiring example

Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a resister of 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to R1, and connect a resistor of 2 kΩ (1/2 W) − 470 Ω (2 W) to R2. Table of I/O allocation

I/O No. Description I/O No. Description X2 Home sensor input XD Overrunning signal X0 Near home sensor input Y0 Pulse output CW X8 Positioning start signal (+) Y1 Pulse output CCW X9 Positioning start signal (-) R10 Positioning in progress XA Home return start signal R11 Positioning operation start XB JOG start signal (+) R12 Positioning done pulse XC JOG start signal (-) R903A High-speed counter control flag for CH0


6.4.5 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal Control (Common to Transistor type)

• This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table.



Sample program Incremental Position Control Operation: Plus Direction When X8 turns on, the pulse is output from CW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0.

Program

Pulse output diagram


Incremental Position Control Operation: Minus Direction When X9 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0.

Program



Absolute position control operation When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from CW output Y0 or CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0. If the current value at that point is larger than 22000, the pulses are output from Y1, and if the value is smaller than 22000, the pulses are output from Y0.

Program



6.4.6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 – Home Return (Common to Transistor type)

• This function performs home return according to the specified data table. The elapsed value area CH0 (DT90044, DT90045) and CH1 (DT90200, DT90202) is cleared to zero after the completion of home return.



Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FPΣ: Type I and Type II. Type I home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input, whether deceleration is taking place, or whether deceleration has been completed.

Type II home return In this mode, the home input is effective only after deceleration (started by near home input) has been completed.

Reference: The Pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the near home input. <6.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)>.


Sample program Home return operation using CH0: Minus direction When XA turns on, a pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and the return to home begins. When X0 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X2 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0.

Program



Sample program Home return operation using CH2: Plus direction When XB turns on, a pulse is output from CW output Y3 of the specified channel CH2 and the return to home begins. When X3 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90200 and DT90201 are cleared to 0.

Program



6.4.7 Pulse Output Instruction F172 – JOG operation

• This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition (trigger) turns on.


Key Point: The FPΣ supports two operation modes for JOG operation, one in which no target value is specified, and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached. Normal jogging operation feed (no target value specified) Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table, as long as execution condition is on.

Output stops when target value is reached (FPΣ Ver 1.4 or later) With FPΣ Ver 1.4 or later, a target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation. As shown below, this mode is selected in the control code, and the target value (an absolute value) is specified in the data table.


Sample program JOG operation : Plus direction While XB is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0. Program



JOG operation : Minus direction While XC is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0. Program


Reference: The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the pulse output stop. <6.4.4 Pulse output control instruction (F0)>


6.4.8 Positioning Control Instruction F174 – Data Table Contro.

• Positioning is performed according to the specified data table.



6.4.9 Action of the Flag concerning Linear Interpolation and Circular Interpolation

Key Point: Can be used with C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H only. Table of flag Allocation

Address Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program

R903A Control flag (CH0)

Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions that include a circular interpolation instruction and then maintains that state during pulse output from CH0. This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F176.

Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high-speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions, and to verify completion of an action.

R903C Control flag (CH2)

Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions that include a circular interpolation instruction and then maintains that state during pulse output from CH2. This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F176.

Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high-speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions, and to verify completion of an action.

R904E Control flag for circular interpolation

Turns on when circular interpolation instruction F176 starts up and maintains that state until the target value is reached. When the target value has not been reached even if the circular interpolation instruction execution condition is off, that state is maintained.

Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high-speed counter instructions and to verify completion of a circular interpolation action. When this flag is on, other positioning instructions F171 to F176 cannot be started.

R904F Confirmation flag for overwriting circular interpolation

Turns on for one scan when the circular interpolation instruction F176 starts up. (The set time is ON time when the periodical interrupt program is executed.)

When conducting control with the continuous mode for performing continuous circular interpolation actions, use this after circular interpolation instruction startup when overwriting the next target value.

Note: • When the target value has not been reached and the execution condition is off, circular interpolation

control flag R904E turns on and other positioning instructions F171 to F176 cannot be started. • The above flags vary during scanning.

Example: If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions, there may be the different states in the same scan. Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a measure.


Flag movement when command running

Action when the execution conditions turn OFF • Differing from other pulse output instructions, circular interpolation instruction F176 executes the

execution conditions as continually ON. • Circular interpolation instruction F176 stops pulse output when the execution conditions turn OFF.

Note: • Right when the execution condition turn off, positioning instructions F171 to F176, other than the

currently running instruction F176, cannot be started up when the target value has not been reached. • When restarting, use pulse output control instruction F0, below, to reset the pulse output instruction.

This operation resets the control flag for circular interpolation (R904E).

About composite speed setting

• The maximum composite speed setting is 20 kHz. Use the range of the formula given below as a guide when setting the composite speed. Fv (Hz) ≦ r (pulse) × 10/t (ms) Fv : Composite speed (Hz) R : Radius (pulse) t : Scan time (ms) Example: Radius r: 1000 (pulse), Scan time 5ms Fv ≦ 1000 (p) × 10/5 (ms) = 2000 Hz

Note: • The instruction calculates the component speed at each scan. Therefore, accuracy may be degraded if

the scan time exceeds 10 ms. If this should happen, execute circular interpolation instruction F176 using the periodical interrupt function with an interrupt time of around 0.5 ms.


Restrictions on positioning data setting • Designate settings for the target position, pass position and center position so they are within the

following range. Allowable range: -8,388,608 to +8,388,608

• When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171, designate so the target value is within the above range, even in those instructions.


Sample program for interpolation control Wiring diagram

Note) If the input of the stepping motor is 5V photocoupler type, connect a resistor of 2kΩ(1/2 W) to R1, and connect a resistor of 2kΩ(1/2 W) − 470Ω(2 W) to R2.


Home return operation (Minus direction) When XA turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and CCW output Y4 of the specified channel CH2, and the return to home begins. In CH0, when X3 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X2 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0. In CH2, when X6 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90200 and DT90201 are cleared to 0. When the operations in both CHs is completed, the return to home completes.


Program

Key Point: As there is not interpolation function for the home return, the home return should be executed for each channel. After the home return for both channels is completed, the positioning operation running program (R40) turns off. Pulse output diagram


6.4.10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 – Linear Interpolation (Only for C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H)

• The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.



6.4.11 Pulse Output Instruction F176 – Circular Interpolation (Only for C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H)

• The circular interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.



Sample program Continuous interpolation control (linear and circular) • Using linear and circular interpolation functions, perform positioning control that draws trajectory like

the one shown below. • The interval between the first position P1 and P2 and the interval between P3 and P4 perform control

using linear interpolation. • The interval between P2 and P3 performs circular interpolation control using center designation. • The interval between P4 and P1 performs circular interpolation control using passing position

designation.

I/O Allocation

I/O No. Description I/O No. Description XB Positioning start R9010 Always ON XC Emergency stop switch R903A Control flag (CH0) R20 From P1 to P2 start R903C Control flag (CH2) R21 From P2 to P3 start R904E Circular interpolation control flag R22 From P3 to P4 start R23 From P4 to P1 start R2F Positioning done


Data register allocation

Item Data register No. Details On this program details

User setting area for linear interpolation P1 to P2 P3 to P4

DT0 to DT1 Control code Control code when executing linear interpolation, absolute

DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000 Hz

DT6 Acceleration/de-celeration time

0 ms

DT8 to DT9 Target position (X-axis)

Specify the target position of X-axis when moving from P1 to P2 and P3 to P4.

DT10 to DT11 Target position (Y-axis)

Specify the target position of Y-axis when moving from P1 to P2 and P3 to P4.

Work area DT12 to DT23 Operation result storage area

Parameters calculated due to instruction execution are stored.

User setting are for circular interpolation P4 to P1

DT40 to DT41 Control code

Specify control codes when executing the circular interpolation of P4 to P1. Stop mode, Pass position setting, Absolute From CH0-CW to CH2-CW direction

DT42 to DT43 Composite speed 2000 Hz


Specify the target position of X-axis when moving from P4 to P1.


Specify the target position of Y-axis when moving from P4 to P1.

DT48 to DT49 Pass position (X-axis)

Specify the X-coordinate of the pass position when moving from P4 to P1.

DT50 to DT51 Pass position (Y-axis)

Specify the Y-coodinate of the pass position when moving from P4 to P1.

Work area for circular interpolation

DT52 to DT57 Operation result storage area


User setting area for circular interpolation P2 to P3

DT60 to DT61 Control code

Specify control codes when executing the circular interpolation of P2 to P3. Stop mode, Center position setting, Absolute From CH0-CW to CH2-CW direction

DT62 to DT63 Composite speed 2000 Hz


Specify the target position of X-axis when moving from P2 to P3.


Specify the target position of Y-axis when moving from P2 to P3.

DT68 to DT69 Center position (X-axis)

Specify the X-coordinate of the center position when executing the circular interpolation of P2 to P3.

DT70 to DT71 Center position (Y-axis)

Specify the Y-coordinate of the center position when executing the circular interpolation of P2 to P3.

Work area for circular interpolation

DT72 to DT73 Operation result storage area


Key Point: • With this program, because the next action that follows circular interpolation control is linear

interpolation, the control code is designated with the stop mode. • The rotation direction during circular interpolation is the same direction for both P2 to P3 and P4 to P1.

Designate the control code rotation direction with “from CH0-CW direction to CH2-CW direction”. • Use the circular interpolation control flag R904E to verify completion of the circular interpolation action.


Program

(Continued on the next page)



Sample program (Continue mode method) • This is a program that continually executes the circular interpolation action. • Start the first point P1 (0, 0), overwrite the target value three times, and move to final position P4. • To overwrite the data after startup, use the special internal relay R904F and a shift register.

I/O Allocation

I/O No. Description I/O No. Description XB Positioning start R903A Control flag (CH0) R0 Positioning running R903C Control flag (CH2) R1 Positioning done R904E Circular interpolation control flag R10 Data setting for the control from P1 to P2 R904F Set value change confirmation flag R11 Data setting for the control from P2 to P3 R12 Data setting for the control from P3 to P4 R13 Mode changing for stoppage

Note) R10 to R13 are used by shift register. Data register allocation

Item Data register No. Details On this program details

User setting area

DT1000 to 1001 Control code

Continue mode, Absolute Pass position setting method Rotation direction changes according to the control direction.

DT1002 to 1003 Composite speed 1000 Hz

DT1004 to 1005 Target position Target position (X-axis) P2 to P4 DT1006 to 1007 Target position Target position (Y-axis) P2 to P4 DT1008 to 1009 Pass position Target position (X-axis) S1 to S3 DT1010 to 1011 Pass position Target position (Y-axis) S3 to S3

Work area DT1012 to 1017 Operation result storage area


Special DT

DT90044 to 90045

Elapsed value area (CH0) Current position (X-axis) : 0

DT90200 to 90201

Elapsed value area (CH2) Current position (Y-axis) : 0


Program


Key Point: • To overwrite the data after startup use the circular interpolation data overwrite permission flag R904F. • In control that heads toward final point P4, designate by switching the control code to the stop mode. • In this example, since the rotation direction changes for each positioning point, designation of the

control code rotation direction is as follows. Between P1 and P2: From CH2-CW to CH0-CW direction Between P2 and P3: From CH0-CW to CH2-CW direction Between P3 and P4: From CH2-CW to CH0-CW direction


6.5 PWM Output Function

6.5.1 Overview

PWM output function With the F173 (PWMH) instruction, the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained. System register setting When using the PWM output function, set the channel CH0 and CH2 with system registers 400 and 401 to “High-speed counter not used”.

6.5.2 PWM Output Instruction F173

Data table DT100 Control code *1 : K1 DT101 Duty *2 : 50%

*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant. Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100

K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K0 1.5 666.67 K20 15.6 k 0.06 K1 2.0 502.51 K21 20.8 k 0.05 K2 4.1 245.70 K22 25.0 k 0.04 K3 6.1 163.93 K23 31.3 k 0.03 K4 8.1 122.85 K24 41.7 k 0.02 K5 9.8 102.35 K6 19.5 51.20 K7 48.8 20.48 K8 97.7 10.24 K9 201.6 4.96 K10 403.2 2.48 K11 500.0 2.00 K12 694.4 1.44 K13 1.0 k 0.96 K14 1.3 k 0.80 K15 1.6 k 0.64 K16 2.1 k 0.48 K17 3.1 k 0.32 K18 6.3 k 0.16 K19 12.5 k 0.08


*2: specification of duty (specify using K constant) If the control code is K0 to K19, the duty is K0 to K999 (0.0% to 99.9%). If the control code is K20 to K24, the duty is K0 to K990 (0% to 99%). Values are specified in units of 1% (K10) (digits behind the decimal point are rounded off).

Note: • If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,

a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started, an operation error is occurred.



Chapter 7 Communication Cassette


7.1 Functions and Types

7.1.1 Functions of Communication Cassette

With the optional communication cassette, the FPΣ offers three different communication modes: computer link, general-purpose serial communication, and PC(PLC) link. Computer link • The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and

external devices connected. A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used for communicating with the computer link. MEWTOCOL-COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN-GR and the PLC.

• There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link. The side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes the process and sends back responses is called slave.

Note: It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function. 1. Only the slave function is available for the FPΣ 12k type. 2. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FPΣ 32k type, however, the master function

is not available for the TOOL port. MEWTOCOL master function (32k type only) • This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side 0that issues commands) of the

computer link. It is executed with the PLC’s instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose communication function.

The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL-COM. [Our devices (e.g.)] : PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, eco-power meter For the MEWTOCOL master function, communication is possible with COM1 port and COM2 port of the 32k type only. Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.


MEWTOCOL slave function • This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the

results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or PLC.

• The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation.

General-purpose serial communication • With general-purpose serial communication, data can be sent back and forth between an image

processing device connected to the COM. port and an external device such as a bar code reader. • Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FPΣ, while reading and writing of

data from an external device connected to the COM. port is handled through the FPΣ data registers.


PC(PLC) link • In a PC(PLC) link, data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays

called link relays (L) and data registers called link registers (LD). • If the link relay contact for one PLC goes on, the same link relay also goes on in each of the other

PLCs connected to the network. Likewise, if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC, the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network.

• The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network, so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network, such as target production values and type codes, can easily be implemented to coordinate the data, and the data of all units are updated at the same time.

- Link relay In the figure below, when link relay L0 of the master station (no.1) turns on, this signal is converted by the programs of the other stations, and Y0 of the other stations is activated. - Link register In the figure below, if a constant of 100 is written to LD0 of the master station (no.1), the contents of LD0 in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100.


MODBUS RTU (32k type only) Function overview • The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FPΣ and other devices (including

our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit). • Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave

units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions. • Enables the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave

function is equipped. About MODBUS RTU • The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave

units communicating between them. • There are ASCI mode and RTU (binary) mode in the MODBUS protocol, however, the FPΣ is

supported with the RTU (binary) mode only. Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV) instructions. Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.

Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response message corresponding to the content. Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.


7.1.2 Types of Communication Cassette

1-channel RS232C type (Product No. AFPG801) This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a five-wire RS232C port. RS/CS control is possible. Terminal layout

Abbreviation Name Signal direction Port SD Transmitted Data FPΣ → External device

COM1 port RD Received Data FPΣ ← External device RS Request to Send FPΣ → External device CS Clear to Send FPΣ ← External device SG Signal Ground

Note1) RS (Request to Send) is controllable by the SYS1 instruction. Note2) Data cannot be sent without the pin CS (Clear to Send). When using with a three-wire port, short-

circuit the pin RS and CS. 1:1 communication 1:N communication Computer link Available Not available General-purpose serial communication Available Not available PC(PLC) link Available Note) MODBUS RTU Available Not available

Note) Number of units is two. 2-channel RS232C type (Product No. AFPG802) This communication cassette is a 2-channel unit with a three-wire RS232C port. Communication with two external devices is possible. Terminal layout

Abbreviation Name Signal direction Port S1 Transmitted Data 1 FPΣ → External device

COM1 port R1 Received Data 1 FPΣ ← External device S2 Transmitted Data 2 FPΣ → External device

COM2 port R2 Received Data 2 FPΣ ← External device

SG Signal Ground COM1 port COM2 port

1:1 communication 1:N communication Computer link Available Not available General-purpose serial communication Available Not available PC(PLC) link Available Note) MODBUS RTU Available Not available

Note) Number of units is two. 1-channel RS485 type (Product No. AFPG803) This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a two-wire RS485 port.


Terminal layout

Abbr. Name Signal direction Port

+ Transmission line (+)

COM1 port

− Transmission line (−) + Transmission line (+) − Transmission line (−) E Terminal station setting

1:1 communication 1:N communication Computer link Not available Available General-purpose serial communication Not available Available PC(PLC) link Available MODBUS RTU Not available Available

Note) When using this cassette, the data transmission is executed with the STOP2 regardless of the setting for the stop bit. The data reception is available with 1 or 2 regardless of the setting for the stop bit. 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C combination type (Product No. AFPG806) This communication cassette equips a 1-channel unit with a two-wire RS485 port and 1-channel unit with a three-wire RS232C port.

Terminal layout

Abbr. Name Signal direction Port

+ Transmission line (+)

RS485 (COM1

port) − Transmission line (−)

SD Sent Data FPΣ → External device RS232C (COM2 port)

RD Received Data FPΣ ← External device SG Signal Ground

1:1 communication 1:N communication Computer link Available Available General-purpose serial communication Available Available PC(PLC) link Available Note) MODBUS RTU Available Available

Note) PC(PLC) link is available only for RS485.


Communication cassette LED indication The indication of the control unit is for 2-channel RS232C type. For the other types, refer to the following.

Indication of control unit AFPG801 AFPG802 AFPG803 AFPG806

SD SD SD

RS485 SD

RD RD RD RS485 RD

RS SD Not used

RS232C SD

CS RD Not used

RS232C RD

LED Communicating: Flashes No communication: Lights out SD: Sent data (output) RD: Received data (input) Difference of dimensions

AFPG801 AFPG806 AFPG802 Note) This is longer by 5mm. AFPG803


7.1.3 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports

Port name Port type Communication function

COM0 port Standard feature (Mini DIN 5-pin connector)

Computer link General-purpose serial communication (in RUN mode only)

COM1 port Communication cassette

Computer link MEWTOCOL master General-purpose serial communication PC(PLC) link MODBUS RTU

COM port 2 Communication cassette

Computer link MEWTOCOL master General-purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU

7.1.4 Setting of AFPG806 Switch

Only when using RS485 port (COM1) It is necessary to set the built-in switch and the system register both to set the baud rate.


7.2 Communication Specifications Communication Specifications

Computer link Note1) 9) General-purpose serial communication Note1) 9)

PC(PLC) link

MODBUS RTU Note1)

1:1 communi-

cation

1:N communi-

cation

1:1 communi-

cation

1:N communi-

cation

1:1 communi-

cation

1:N communi-

cation

Interface RS232C RS485 RS232C RS485 RS232C Note2) RS485 RS232C RS485

Target items

AFPG-801 AFPG-802 AFPG-806

AFPG-803 AFPG-806


AFPG-803 AFPG-806

AFPG-801 AFPG-802 AFPG-803 AFPG-806


AFPG-803 AFPG-806

Commu-nication method

Half-duplex communi-cation

Two-wire, half-duplex communi-cation



Token bus (Floating master)



Note1) Although it has adequate tolerance to noise, it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission (in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily). Note2) The number of units of the PC(PLC) link with RS232C is two. Communication specifications

Item Specifications Interface RS232C (non-isolated) RS485 (isolated) Note1) 2) Communication mode 1:1 communication 1:N communication Communication method Half-duplex communication Two-wire half-duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Shielded twisted-pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance 15 m Max. 1200 m Note1) 2) Baud rate Note3) Note8) (to be set by system register) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

Trans-mission code

Computer link ASCII, JIS7, JIS8 General-purpose serial communication ASCII, JIS7, JIS8, Binary

MODBUS RTU Binary Communication format (to be set by system register) Note4)

Data length 7 bits/8 bits Parity None/Even/Odd Stop bit 1 bit/2 bits Start code STX/No STX End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX

No. of connected units Note5) 6) 7) 2 units Max. 99 units (Max. 32 units when C-NET adapter is connected.)

Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance, and baud rate vary depending on the connected device.


Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below.

When using a baud rate of 2400 bps to 38400 bps, you can set up to a maximum of 99 units (stations) and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m.

Note3) Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface. Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication mode. Note5) The converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side. Adjust the response time for the FP-X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary. Note6)Regarding the setting of unit numbers: When the unit number setting switch is “0”, the system register is effective. When the unit number setting switch is other than “0”, the unit number setting switch is effective, and the unit number setting of the system register is ignored. (Max. 31 units can be specified with the unit number setting switch.) (When the setting is specified with the unit number setting switch, the COM1 port and the COM2 port has the same unit number. Note7)Connect the “−“ terminal and the “+” terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective. The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette. There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port. Note8) The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only. Also the baud rate must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette. The baud rate for the PC(PLC) link mode is fixed at 115200 bps. The baud rate for the RS232C port of the AFPG806 can be set by the system register only. Note9) The MEWTOCOL master function, MODBUS RTU master function and general-purpose serial communication function at the TOOL port is available only for the FPΣ 32k type.


7.2.1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port

FPG-COM3 (AFPG803), FPG-COM4 (AFPG806) SYS1 instruction is available for FPΣ, which enables to change the time after receiving a command until a response is returned. With the converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd, adjust the response time by this instruction if necessary. SYS1 instruction: This is to delay a response for [n] scan time to be specified.

Example:

When R0 turns on, the response of COM1 port (RS485 port) delays for two scans. If the scan time is 500µs, it delays for 1 ms.

Reference: <FP series Programming manual>

The RS485 port of AFPG806 (COM4) occupies the communication line for a given time after transmitting data. No transmission is available during this period. When data is transmitted from FPΣ via the RS485 communication of AFPG806 (COM4), start the transmission of the data to FPΣ after the time mentioned blow passes at a receiver.


7-13

Following adjustments are required depending on the types of connected equipment. 1. With FP (when the connected equipment are also the combination of FP and AFPG806) When PC(PLC) link mode: Adjustment is not required. When general communication mode: Adjust timing by ladder program. When computer link mode: Adjust timing by SYS1 instruction.

2. With other PLC When PC(PLC) link mode: Not used. When general communication mode: Adjust timing by ladder program.

3. With computer Adjust timing by wait instruction system.

4. With other equipment’s Confirm the time after receiving data until a transmission starts with makers. KT temperature controller and inverters (VF-7E and VF-8X) can be used without any adjustment, as

the time taken up to a response is more than 1 ms. With GT-series or GV-series programmable display set the transmission delay time (communication

parameter) to 1 ms or more.


7.3 Installation and Wiring

7.3.1 Installation of Communication Cassette

1. Turn off the power supply to the control unit before installing the communication cassette. 2. Remove cover using screwdriver.

3. Install communication cassette.

4. Plug in communication connector.


7.3.2 Wiring

Accessory communication connector/Suitable wire The communication cassette is supplied with a communication connector, which has a screw-type terminal block. Use the following items for wiring.

Accessory communication connector If additional connectors are needed, use the communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact.

Number of pins Phoenix Contact product ID Model No. Product No.

5 pins MC1, 5/5-ST-3, 5 1840395 Suitable wire (twisted wire)

Number of wires Size Cross-sectional area 1 AWG#28 to 16 0.08mm2 to 1.25 mm2 2 AWG#28 to 18 0.08mm2 to 0.75 mm2

Use the above wires shielded. It is recommended to ground the shielded part. Pole terminals

Manufacturer Cross-sectional area (mm2)

Size Part No. With insulating sleeve

Without insulating sleeve

Phoenix Contact Co.

0.25 AWG #24 AI 0,25 – 6 BU A 0,25 – 7 0.34 AWG #22 AI 0.34 – 6 TQ A 0,34 – 7 0.50 AWG #20 AI 0,5 – 6 WH A 0,5 – 6 0.75 AWG #18 AI 0,75 – 6 GY A 0,75 – 6 1.00 AWG #18 – A 1 – 60 0.5×2 AWG #20 (for 2

pcs) AI – TWIN 2× 0.5 – 8 WH

–

Pressure welding tool for pole terminals

Manufacturer Phoenix Contact product ID Model No. Product No.

Phoenix Contact CRIMPFOX 6 1212034


Screwdriver for terminal block To tighten the terminals of the communication connector, use a screwdriver by Phoenix Contact (product no. 1205037, blade size 0.4 x 2.5, model no. SZS 0,4 x 2,5). The tightening torque should be 0.22 to 0.25 Nm (2.3 kgfcm to 2.5 kgfcm). Wiring method 1. Remove 7 mm of the wire’s insulation.

2. Insert wire into terminal hole until it stops. Tighten screw clockwise to fix wire in place. (Tightening torque: 0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm (2.3 kgfcm to 2.5 kgfcm)

Notes for wiring • When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire. • Do not twist the wires to connect them. • Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration. • After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire. • In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire is fastened upon counter-clockwise rotation of the

screw, the connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the wire.

• If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 of AFPG806 (COM4), use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which is 0.5 to 0.75 mm2.


7.3.3 Cables

Please use the following cables for systems using RS485 type communication cassettes. Appropriate electrical cables (twisted cables)

Type Cross-sectional view

Conductor Insulator Cable diam.

Sample appropriate

cable Size Resist-ance

(at 20°C) Material Thick-

ness

Shielded twisted

pair

1.25 mm2 (AWG16) or greater

Max. 16.8 Ω/km

Polye-thylene

Max. 0.5 mm

Approx. 8.5 mm

Belden 9860 Hitachi Cable,

Ltd. KPEV-S1.25 mm2 x

1P


Max. 33.4 Ω/km

Polye-thylene

Max. 0.5 mm

Approx. 7.8 mm

Belden 9207 Hitachi Cable,

Ltd. KPEV-S0.5 mm2 x

1P

VCTF


Max. 25.1 Ω/km

Polychlo-rinated

biphenyl

Max. 0.6 mm

Approx. 6.6 mm

VCTF-0.75 mm2 x 2C(JIS)

Note:

• Use shielded twisted pair cables. • Use only one type of transmission cable. Do not mix more than 1 type. • Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments. • When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line, grounded one end. • If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 of AFPG806 (COM4),

use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which is 0.5 to 0.75 mm2.


7.4 Communication Function 1: Computer Link

7.4.1 Computer Link

Overview

Computer link • The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and

external devices connected. A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used for communicating with the computer link. MEWTOCOL-COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN-GR and the PLC.

• There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link. The side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes the process and sends back responses is called slave.

•

Note: It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function. 1. Only the slave function is available for the FPΣ 12k type. 2. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FPΣ 32k type, however, the master function is not available for the TOOL port.


MEWTOCOL master function (32k type only) • This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side 0that issues commands) of the

computer link. It is executed with the PLC’s instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose communication function.

The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL-COM. [Our devices (e.g.)] : PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, eco-power meter For the MEWTOCOL master function, communication is possible with the 32k-type COM1 and COM2 ports only. Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.

MEWTOCOL slave function • This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the

results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or PLC.

• The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation.


Outline of operation when using computer link (MEWTOCOL slave) Command and response • Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands. Messages sent back to the

computer from the PLC are called responses. When the PLC receives a command, it processes the command regardless of the sequence program, and sends a response back to the computer.

MEWTOCOL-COM sketch • Communication is carried out in a conversational format, based on the MEWTOCOL-COM

communication procedures. • Data is sent in ASCII format. • The computer has the first right of transmission. The right of transmission shifts back and forth

between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent.


Format of command and response Command message All command-related items should be noted in the text segment. The unit number must be specified before sending the command.

1. Header (start code) Commands must always have a “%” (ASCII code: H25) or a “<” (ASCII code: H3C) at the beginning of a message. 2. Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified. In 1:1 communication, the unit number “01” (ASCII code: H3031) should be specified. 3. Text The content differs depending on the command. The content should be noted in all upper-case characters, following the fixed formula for the particular command.

4. Check code BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character. The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with character text. It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically. The parity check can be skipped by entering “* *” (ASCII code: H2A2A) instead of the BCC. 5. Terminator (end code) Messages must always end with a “CR” (ASCII code: H0D).


Note: • The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command. • If there is a large number of characters to be written, they may be divided and sent as several

commands. If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded, they may be divided and several responses sent.

Key Point: • With the FPΣ, an expansion header “<” is supported to send single frames of up to 2048 characters as

well as general “%”. Type of header No. of characters that can be sent in 1 frame

% Max. 118 characters < Max. 2048 characters

Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer.

1. Header (start code) A “%” (ASCII code: H25) or “<” (ASCII code: H3C) must be at the beginning of a message. The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command. 2. Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here. 3. Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command. The value should be read based on the content. If the processing is not completed successfully, an error code will be stored here, so that the content of the error can be checked.


4. Check code BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with character text. 5. Terminator (end code) There is always a “C

R” (ASCII code: H0D) at the end of the message.

Note: • If no response is returned, the communication format may not be correct, or the command may not

have arrived at the PLC, or the PLC may not be functioning. Check to make sure all of the communication specifications (e.g. baud rate, data length, and parity) match between the computer and the PLC.

• If the response contains an “!” instead of a “$”, the command was not processed successfully. The response will contain a communication error code. Check the meaning of the error code.

• Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response (see below). This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear.


Commands Command name Code Description

Read contact area

RC (RCS) (RCP) (RCC)

Reads the on and off status of contacts. - Specifies only one point. - Specifies multiple contacts. - Specifies a range in word units.

Write contact area

WC (WCS) (WCP) (WCC)

Turns contacts on and off. - Specifies only one point. - Specifies multiple contacts. - Specifies a range in word units.

Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area. Write data area WD Writes data to a data area. Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter. Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value. Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value. Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value. Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored. Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.

Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC.

Preset contact area (fill command) SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-point on and off pattern.

Preset data area (fill command) SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range.

Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register. Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.

Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs.

Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller.

Abort AB Aborts communication.


Setting communication parameters Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using the FPWIN GR. Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Double-click “COM Port”. There are separate settings for COM1 and COM2 . Note) Also, select “Computer Link” when using the MEWTOCOL master function. (FPΣ 32k type only) Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 410 unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99. However, if the unit no. setting switch of the FPΣ has been set to the numbers other than 0, the setting of the unit no. setting switch becomes effective. In this case, the same number is given to the port 1 and port 2. When specifying the number by a system register, set the unit no. setting switch to “0”. No. 412 Communication mode Select the COM port operation mode:

Click on , and select “Computer Link”.

No. 413 (for COM1 port), No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting Default setting: Char. Bit …………… 8 bits Parity ………………. Odd Stop Bit ……………. 1 bit Terminator ………… CR Header …………….. STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port, enter the settings for the various items. No. 415 Baud rate (communication speed) setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps. Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port:

Click on , and select one of the values from 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and

115200 bps. Restrictions • The two ports of the communication cassette can be used independently. They can be set to computer

link mode or general-purpose serial communication • There is no restriction when multiple ports are used.


7.4.2 1:1 Communication (Computer link)

System register settings Settings for COM1 port (AFPG801, AFPG802)

No. Name Set Value No. 410 COM1 port unit number 1 No. 412 Note) COM1 port selection of communication mode Computer link No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length: ……

Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………

7 bits/8 bits None/Odd/Even 1 bit/2 bit CR STX not exist

No. 415 Note) Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps Settings for COM2 port (AFPG802, AFPG806)

No. Name Set Value No. 411 COM2 port unit number 1 No. 412 Note) COM2 port selection of communication mode Computer link No. 414 Communication format for COM2 port Data length: ……



No. 415 Note) Baud rate setting for COM2 port 2400 to 115200 bps The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the connected computer. Note) They are set in different bit positions of the same system register no., so the different settings are possible for port 1 and port 2. Programming • For a computer link, a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and

response messages to be received on the computer side. The PLC automatically sends back a response to a command. No communication program is required on the PLC side.

• Also, if a software program such as PCWAY is used on the computer side, PLC data can easily be read and written without having to think about the MEWTOCOL-COM protocol


Connection to the computer <1:1 communication> Overview For a 1:1 computer link between the FPΣ and a computer, an RS232C cable is needed. Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.

<Using AFPG801 (1-channel RS232C type communication cassette>

<Using AFPG802 (2channel RS232C type communication cassette>

<Using AFPG806(Combination of 1-channel RS485 type and 1-channel RS232C type>


7.4.3 1:N Communication (Computer Link)

Overview For a 1:N computer link, the computer and the FPΣ are connected through a commercially available RS232C-RS485 conversion adapter, and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable. The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses: The computer sends a command specifying the unit number, and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer.

When data is transmitted from FPΣ via the RS485 communication of AFPG806 (COM4), start the transmission of the data to FPΣ after the time mentioned blow passes at a receiver. In case of 19200 bps: 1 ms In case of 115200 bps: 200µs Note) Lineeye SI-35 is recommended to be used as a conversion adapter. Setting system registers Setting of COM1 port

No. Name Set value No. 410 COM1 port unit number 1 to 99 (Set the desired unit number)

(With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of 32 units (stations) can be specified.)

No. 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode Computer link No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length: ……



No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps

Note1) The communication format and baud rate (communication speed) should be set to match the connected computer. Note2) The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only. Also the baud rate must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette.

Note3) Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid. Note4) Connect the “−“ terminal and the “E” terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective. The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette.


Setting of unit numbers By default, the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings. There is no need to change this for 1:1 communication, but if 1:N communication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line (e.g. in a C-NET), the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified. The unit number is specified either by using the unit number setting switch or the system register.

When the unit number setting switch is “0”, the system register is valid. When the unit number setting switch is “other than 0”, the unit number setting switch is valid, and the unit number setting of the system register is ignored. In this case, the same number is given to the port 1 and port 2.

Note: • Unit numbers set using the unit number setting switch are valid only for the communication port of the

communication cassette. Tool port unit numbers should be set using the system register.


Setting unit numbers with the setting switch The unit number setting switch is located underneath the cover on the left side of the FPΣ control unit. By setting the selector switch and the dial, a unit number between 1 and 31 can be set.

Table of switch settings and related unit numbers

• A unit number between 1 and 31 can be set. • Set the unit number setting switch to “0” to make

the system register valid. • The same unit number is given to the COM1 port

and COM2 port when using the unit number setting switch. (Use the system register setting to set the unit number individually for the COM1 port and COM2 port.)

Setting unit numbers with the system register A unit number between 1 and 99 can be set with the system register. Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid. To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR programming software: Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Double-click “COM Port”. There are separate settings for COM1 and COM2 . Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 410 (for COM1 port), No. 411 (for COM2 port) unit number settings

Click on , and select a unit number from 1 to 99.

Note) With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of 32 units (stations) can be specified.


Connection with external devices AFPG803 Connection diagram

With 1:N communication, the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables. The (+) and (-) signals of transmission line 1 and transmission line 2 are connected inside the communication cassette, and either port may be used as COM1 port. Setting of terminal station In the PLC that serves as the final unit (terminal station), the transmission line (-) and the E terminal should be shorted.


AFPG806 Connection diagram

In case of using the AFPG806, connect two cables each to the (+) terminal and (-) terminal. Use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which should be 0.5 to 0.75 mm2. Setting of terminal station The terminal station is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette.


7.4.4 MEWTOCOL Master (Sample Program) (Available For 32k Type Only)

Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function. Sample program

Reference: For the information on the F145(SEND) and F146(RECV) instructions, <Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>


Flow chart

The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly. 1. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are matched. 2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the

COM1 port. 3. Reads the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from

the COM1 port. Note) The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port.


7.5 Communication Function: General-purpose Serial Communication

7.5.1 General-purpose Serial Communication

Overview • In general-purpose serial communication, data is sent and received over the COM ports to and from an

external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader. • Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of an FPΣ

program and the FPΣ data registers.

Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general-purpose serial communication function, the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used. The F159 (MTRN) instruction and the “reception done” flag are used in these operations, to transfer data between the FPΣ and an external device. Sending data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT). When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the data is output from the COM port.

• The terminator specified in the system register is automatically added to the data that has been sent.

• The maximum volume of data that can be sent is 2048 bytes.


Receiving data Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register, and the “reception done” flag goes on. Data can be received whenever the “reception done” flag is off.

• When data is being received, the “reception

done” flag is controlled by the F159 (MTRN) instruction.

• No terminator is included in the stored data. • The maximum volume of data that can be

received is 4096 bytes.


Setting Baud rate, communication format By default, the COM port is set to “Computer link”. System register settings should be entered for the following items. The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Double-click “COM Port”. There are separate settings for COM1 and COM2 . Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 412 Communication Mode Select the COM port operation mode:

Click on , and select “General Communication”. No. 413 (for COM1 port), No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting Default setting: Char. Bit …………… 8 bits Parity ………………. Odd Stop Bit ……………. 1 bit Terminator ………… CR Header …………….. STX not exist Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to the COM port.. No. 415 Baud rate (communication speed) setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps. Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port:

Click on , and select one of the values from 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and

115200 bps. No. 416 (for COM1 port), No. 418 (for COM2 port) Starting address for data received No. 417 (for COM1 port), No. 419 (for COM2 port) Buffer capacity setting for data received To use general-purpose serial communication, the receive buffer must be specified. By default, the entire data register area is defined as the receive buffer. To change this area, specify the starting address using system register no. 416 (no. 418 for COM2 port) and the volume (number of words) using no. 417 (no. 419 for COM2 port). The receive buffer layout is shown below.


7.5.2 Communication with External Devices

Programming example of general-purpose serial communication The F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port. F159 (MTRN) is only used with the FPΣ. It is an updated version of F144 (TRNS) and allows multiple communication ports to be accommodated. F144 (TRNS) is not available with the FPΣ. F159 (MTRN) instruction Data is sent and received via the specified COM port .

Devices that can be specified for S: Devices that can be specified for n: Devices that can be specified for D:

Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer. WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H Only the K constants (only K1 and K2)

Transmission of data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table, starting with the area specified by S, through the COM port specified by D. Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent. When the above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from COM1 port. Reception of data Reception of data is controlled by turning the “reception done” flags R9038/R9048 on and off. The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register. Data can be received when F159 (MTRN) turns the “reception done” flag off. When the reception of the data is completed (the terminator is received), the “reception done” flag turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited. To receive the next data, execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag off to clear the number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction.


Sending data to external devices Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers. Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the data is output from the COM port.

Data table for transmission (send buffer)

Sample program for sending data

The following program transmits the characters “ABCDEFGH (Hex)” to an external device using COM1 port.

The program described above is executed in the following sequence. 1) “ABCDEFGH” is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register. 2) The data is sent from COM1 port using the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Explanatory diagram


Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S.

• Use an F0 (MV) or F95 (ASC) instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data

storage area specified in S. Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 (MTRN) instruction turns on and the “transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 is on, operation is as follows: 1. N is preset in S. The “reception done” flag R9038/R9048 is turned off, and the reception data number is cleared to 0. 2. The set data is transmitted in order from the lower-order byte in S+1 of the table. • During transmission, the “transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 turns off. • If system register 413 or 414 is set to header (start code) with STX, the header is automatically added

to the beginning of the data. • The terminator (end code) specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of

the data.

3. When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted, the S value is cleared to 0 and the “transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 turns on.

When you do not wish to add the terminator (end code) during transmissions: • Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number. • If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data, set system register 413 or 414 to

“Terminator - None”. Programming example: The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator.

Key Point: • Do not include the terminator (end code) in the transmission data. The terminator is added

automatically. • When “STX exist” is specified for the header (start code) in system register 413 or 414, do not add the

header to the transmission data. The header is added automatically. • When using the 1-channel RS232C type communication cassette, transmission does not take place

until CS (Clear to Send) turns on. If you are not going to connect to the other device, connect to RS (Request to Send).

• The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048. • The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.


Receiving data from external devices

Data input from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register, and the “reception done” flag goes on. If the “reception done” flag is off, data can be received at any time.

Data table for reception (receive buffer)

This is the state when the above program is executed.

• DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive buffer. System register settings are as follows: - System register 416: K20 - System register 417: K5

Sample program for receiving data

Eight-byte data received in the receive buffer through COM1 port are copied to DT0.

The program described above is executed in the following sequence. 1) Data is received from the RS232C device to the receive buffer. 2) The “reception done” contact R9038 (R9048) is turned on. 3) The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DT0. 4) The F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed with no data to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off the reception done” contact R9038 (R9048). The system is now ready to receive the next data. (The data in the receive buffer is not cleared.)

Note: • Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress

(e.g., if the “reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.

Explanatory diagram


Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the RS232C port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receive buffer.

• Specify the data registers in system register 416 to 419.

• The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the receive buffer. The initial value is 0.

• Received data is stored in the received data storage area in order from the lower -order byte.

Reception process When the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) is off, operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device. (The R9038 (R9048) flag is off during the first scan after RUN). 1. Incoming data is stored in order from the lower-order byte of the 2nd-word area of the receive buffer. Header and terminator (start and end codes) are not stored.

2. When the terminator (end code) is received, the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns on. Reception of any further data is prohibited. 3. When an F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns off, the number of received bytes is cleared, and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower-order byte.

For repeated reception of data, perform the following steps: 1. Receive data 2. Reception done (R9038/R9048: on, reception prohibited) 3. Process received data 4. Execute F159 (MTRN) (R9038/R9048: off, reception possible) 5. Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception

• The “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns on when data reception from the external device is completed. Reception of any further data is prohibited.

• To receive subsequent data, you must execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction to turn off the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048).

Key Point: • The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.


Data to be sent/received with FPΣ Remember the following when accessing data in the FPΣ send and receive buffers: • If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings, the code STX (H02) will

automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent. • The data without the Code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer, and the “reception

done” flag turns on when the terminator (end code) is received. However, if the code STX is added in the middle of the data, the number of received byte is cleared to 0, and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer.

• A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent. • There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer. Sending data: Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is. Example: The data “12345” is transmitted as an ASCII code to a device with RS232C port.

1. Data sent using the F95 (ASC) instruction should be converted to ASCII code data.

2. If DT100 is being used as the send buffer, data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register (DT101), in two-byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte.

Receiving data: The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data. Example: The data “12345CR” is transmitted from a device with RS232C port. • If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer, received data will be stored in the registers starting from

DT201, in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte.


Flag operation in serial communication Header: No-STX, Terminator: CR Receiving data: The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as follows:

• For general-purpose serial communication, half-duplex transmission must be used. • Reception is disabled when the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is on. • When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write

pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address. • Also, when F159 (MTRN) is executed, the error flag R9037 or R9047, the “reception done” flag R9038

or R9048 and the “transmission done” flag R9039 or R9049 goes off. • Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag

R9039 or R9049 must be observed. • Reception continues even if the error flag R9037 turns on. To resume reception, execute the F159

(MTRN) instruction, which turns off the error flag.

Note: • Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress

(e.g., if the “reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.



Header: STX, Terminator: ETX Receiving data: The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as follows:

• The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order. When the header is received, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.

• Reception is disabled while the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is on. • Also, When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write

pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address. • If there are two headers, data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer. • The “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Therefore, if

F159 (MTRN) is executed at the same time the terminator is received, the “reception done” flag will not be detected.


Sending data: The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as follows:

• Header (STX) and terminator (ETX) are automatically added to the data being transmitted. The data is transmitted to an external device.

• When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “transmission done” flag R9039 or R9049 goes off. • Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag

R9039 or R9049 must be observed.



Changing communication mode of COM port An F159 (MTRN) instruction can be executed to change between general-purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode. To do so, specify H8000 for n (the number of transmission bytes) and execute the instruction. Changing from “general-purpose” to “computer link”

Changing from “computer link” to “general-purpose”

The RS232C port selection flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general-purpose serial communication mode is selected.

Note: • When the power is turned on, the operating mode selected in system register no. 412 takes effect.


7.5.3 Connection with 1:1 Communication (General-purpose serial communication)

System register settings Settings for COM1 port (AFPG801, AFPG802)

No. Name Set Value No. 412 COM1 port selection of communication

mode General-purpose serial communication

No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length: …… Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………

7 bits/8 bits None/Odd/Even 1 bit/2 bits CR/CR+LF/None/ETX No STX/STX

No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer for

COM1 port DT0 to DT32764 (Initial value: DT0)

No. 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words) Settings for COM2 port (AFPG802, AFPG806)

No. Name Set Value No. 412 COM2 port selection of communication


No. 414 Communication format for COM2 port Data length: …… Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………


No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM2 port 2400 to 115200 bps No. 418 Starting address for receive buffer for

COM2 port DT0 to DT32764 (Initial value: DT2048)

No. 419 Receive buffer capacity for COM2 port 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words) Settings for TOOL port (FPΣ 32k type only)

No. Name Set Value No. 412 TOOL port selection of communication


No. 413 Communication format for TOOL port Data length: …… Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………


No. 415 Baud rate setting for TOOL port 2400 to 115200 bps No. 420 Starting address for receive buffer for

TOOL port DT0 to DT32764 (Initial value: DT0)

No. 421 Receive buffer capacity for TOOL port 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 0 words)

Note: The TOOL port becomes the computer link automatically in the PROG. mode even if the general-purpose serial communication has been set. (It is always possible to communicate with the tool software such as FPWIN GR in the PROG. mode)


7.5.4 1:N Communication (General-purpose Serial Communication)

Overview The FPΣ and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable. Using the protocol that matches the external units, the F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data.

When data has been sent from FPΣ via the RS485 communication of AFPG806, start sending data to FPΣ side after the time mentioned below passed at the receiver. In case of 19200 bit/s: 1 ms In case of 115200 bit/s: 200µs

Reference: <7.2.1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port>

System register settings • In the default settings, the COM port is set to computer link mode. Settings for COM1 port

No. Name Set Value No. 412 COM1 port selection of

communication mode General-purpose serial communication

No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port

Data length: …… Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………


No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer

for COM1 port DT0 to DT32764 (Initial value: DT0)

No. 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port

0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words)

Note1) The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices. Note2) The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only. Also the baud rate (communication speed) must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette.

Note3) Connect the “−“ terminal and the “E” terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective. The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette.


7.6 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) link

7.6.1 PC(PLC) link

Overview • The PC(PLC) link is an economic way of linking PLCs, using a twisted-pair cable. • Data is shared between the PLCs using link relays (L) and link registers (LD). • The statuses of the link relays and link registers of one PLC are automatically fed back to the other

PLCs on the same network. • PC(PLC) link is not the default setting. Therefore, the setting of system register no. 412 must be

changed to “PC(PLC) link” in order to use this function. • Unit numbers and link areas are allocated using the system registers.


Operation of PC(PLC) link • Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same

network. • Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register

are changed in all PLCs on the same network.


7.6.2 Setting Communication Parameters

Setting of communication mode In the default settings, the COM port is set to computer link mode. Set the communication mode using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under “Options”, and then select “COM1 port” tab. (The PC(PLC) link is available for COM1 port only.) Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 412 Communication Mode Select the COM port operation mode:

Click on , and select “PC Link”.

Key Point: • When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed:

No. Name Set Value No. 413 Communication format for COM1

port Data length: …… Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………

8 bits Odd 1 bit CR No STX

No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps Note1) Connect the “−“ terminal and the “E” terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective. The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette. Note2) The baud rate of the AFPG806 must be identically set to 115200 bps by the system register and

the dip switch located in the communication cassette.


Setting of unit numbers By default, the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers. In a PC(PLC) link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line, the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs. The unit number is specified either by using the unit number setting switch, SYS1 instruction or the system register. Note1) The priority order for station number settings is as follows: 1. Unit number settings switch 2. SYS1 instruction 3. System registers Note2) Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between them. If there is a missing station number, the transmission time will be longer. Note3) If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no. 47.

Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network. The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network. If unit number setting switch is 0, SYS1 instruction and the system register Is valid. If unit number setting switch is a number other than 0, the unit number setting switch is valid, and the unit number setting with the system register is ignored. The same unit number is given to both COM1 port and COM2 port.

Note: When using the PC(PLC) link with the RS232C, the number of units is 2.


Setting unit numbers with the setting switch The unit number setting switch is located underneath the cover on the left side of the FPΣ control unit. The selector switch and the dial can be used in combination to set a unit number between 1 and 16. (With the RS232C, a maximum of 2 unit number can be set.

Table of switch settings and related unit numbers

• The numbers in a range of 1 to 16 can

be set using the unit number setting switch. With the RS232C, set it to 1 or 2.

• Set the unit number setting switch to 0 to

make the system register setting valid. (Individual settings are possible using the system register setting.)

Setting with the system register Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid. Set the unit numbers using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under “Options”, and then select “COM1 port” tab. Dialog box of PLC system register setting

No. 410 (for COM1 port) Unit number setting Select the COM port operation mode:

Click on , and select a unit number between 1 and 16.

Note1) Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between them. If there is a missing station number, the transmission time will be longer. Note2) If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no. 47. Setting with SYS instruction

Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the SYS instruction settings valid.


Link area allocation • The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC(PLC) link are allocated in the link area of the

CPU unit. Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit.

Note: The PC(PLC) link 1 is available for the FPΣ 32k type only. Set the system register 46 to “Reverse” to use the PC(PLC) link 1. System registers

No. Name Default value Set value

For PC

(PLC) link 0

40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words 41 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words 42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 0 to 127 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words 46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half

Reverse: 2nd half 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0

PC(PLC) link 16 1 to 16 Note1)

For PC

(PLC) link 1

46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half Reverse: 2nd half

50 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words 51 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words 52 Starting number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words 54 Starting number for link data register transmission 128 128 to 255 55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words 57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0

PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 16 Note1)

Note1) The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC(PLC) link. Link area configuration

• Link areas consist of link relays and link registers, and are divided into areas for PC(PLC) link 0 and

PC(PLC) link 1 and used with those units. • The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC(PLC) link 0 or PC(PLC) link 1 is maximum

1024 points (64 words), and the link register is maximum 128 words.

Note: The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit (MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).

Reference: For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.


[Example] The PC(PLC) link areas are divided into send and receive areas. The link relays and link registers are transmitted from the send area to the receive area of a different FPΣ. The link relays and registers in the receive area on the receiving side must be within the same area as on the sending side. For PC(PLC) link 0 Link relay allocation

System registers

No. Name Set value of various control units No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

No. 40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 64 64 64 64 No. 42 Start address of link relay send area 0 20 40 0 No. 43 Size of link relay send area 20 20 24 0

Note) No. 40 (range of link relays) must be set to the same range for all the units. System register allocation

System registers

No. Name Set value of various control units No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

No. 41 Range of link registers used for PC(PLC) link 128 128 128 128 No. 44 Start address of link register send area 0 40 80 0 No. 45 Size of link register send area 40 40 48 0

Note) No. 41 (range of link registers) must be set to the same range for all the units. When link areas are allocated as shown above, the send area of unit no. 1 can be transmitted to the receive areas of units no. 2, 3 and 4. Also, the receive area of unit no. 1 can receive data from the send areas of units no. 2 and 3 . Unit no. 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from units no. 1, 2 and 3, but cannot send data to other units.


For PC(PLC) link 1 (For FPΣ 32k type only) Link relay allocation

System registers

No. Name Setting for various units No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

50 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64 52 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 64 84 104 64 53 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0

Note) No. 50 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units. Link register allocation

System registers

No. Name Setting for various units No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

51 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128 54 Starting No. for link register transmission 128 128 208 128 55 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0

Note) No. 51 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units. When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas. No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot transmit it to other stations.

Note: The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit (MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128). Set the system register 46 to “Reverse” to use the PC(PLC) link 1(the second half of link relays and link registers).

Reference: For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.


Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC(PLC) link, link relays with a total of 1024 points (64 words) and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used. This does not mean, however, that it is necessary to reserve the entire area. Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers. Link relay allocation

No. Name No. No. 40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC)

link 50

No. 42 Start address of link relay send area 20 No. 43 Size of link relay send area 20

With the above settings, the 14 words (224 points) consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays.

Link register allocation

No. Name No. No. 41 Range of link registers used for PC(PLC)

link 100

No. 44 Start address of link register send area 40 No. 45 Size of link register send area 40

With the above settings, the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers.


Note: Precautions for link area allocation

A mistake in the link area allocation will cause an error, and communication will be disabled. Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from the send area to receive area of another FPΣ, send and receive areas must match. In the example shown below, there is an overlapping area between units no. 2 and 3, and this will cause an error, so that communication cannot be carried out. Link relay allocation

System registers

No. Name Set value of various control units No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

No. 40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 64 64 64 No. 42 Start address of link relay send area 0 20 30 No. 43 Size of link relay send area 20 20 34

Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible, neither for link relays nor for link registers: - Send area is split

- Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments


Setting the largest unit number for a PC(PLC) link The largest unit number can be set using system register no. 47 (using system register no. 57 for PC(PLC) link 1 (for FPΣ 32k type only)). [Sample setting]

No. of units linked Setting contents 2 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set

2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set A largest unit no. of 2 is set for each.

4 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set 2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set 3rd unit: Unit no. 3 is set 4th unit: Unit no. 4 is set A largest unit no. of 4 is set for each.

n Nth unit: Unit no. n is set A largest unit no. of n is set for each.

Note: • Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between

them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer. • For all PLCs which are linked, the same value should be set for the largest unit number. • If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set (default=16), or the

largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive, or the unit number settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on, the response time for the PC(PLC) link (the link transmission cycle) will be longer.

Reference: <7.6.5 PC(PLC) Link Response Time>.

Setting PC(PLC) link switching flag (For FPΣ 32k type only) PC(PLC) link switching flag can be set using system register no. 46. If it is set to 0 (default value), the first half of the link relays and registers are used. If it is set to 1, the second half of the link relays and registers are used.


7.6.3 Monitoring

When using a PC(PLC) link, the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays. Transmission assurance relays For PC(PLC) link 0: R9060 to R906F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16) For PC(PLC) link 1: R9080 to R908F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16) (For FPΣ 32k type only) If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs, check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data.

Operation mode relays For PC(PLC) link 0: R9070 to R907F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16) For PC(PLC) link 1: R9090 to R909F (correspond to unit no. 1 to 16) (For FPΣ 32k type only) The operation modes (RUN/PROG.) can be checked for any given PLC.

PC(PLC) link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission.

Key Point: Monitoring the PC(PLC) link status

In FPWIN GR, the PC(PLC) link status items, such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred, can be monitored by selecting the PC(PLC) link switch on the FPWIN GR Status Monitor screen.

Note: Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible.


7.6.4 Connection Example of PC(PLC) link

When using three PLCs The following example demonstrates how the PLC can be connected to two other FPΣ PLCs using a PC(PLC) link connection. In the example shown here, link relays are use. When X1 of control unit no. 1 turns on, Y1 of unit no. 2 turns on. When X2 of unit no. 1 turns on, Y1 of unit no. 3 turns on.

System register settings When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed.

No. Name Set Value No. 413 Communication format for COM1

port Data length: …… Parity check: ….. Stop bit: ………… Terminator: …….. Header: …………

8 bits Odd 1 bit CR No STX

No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps

Note) The baud rate of the AFPG806 must be identically set to 115200 bps by the system register and the dip switch located in the communication cassette.

Reference: <7.1.4 Setting of AFPG806 Switch>.

Unit no. and communication mode settings - Setting for unit no. 1

No. Name Set value No. 410 COM1 port unit no. 1 No. 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode PC(PLC) link

- Setting for unit no. 2


- Setting for unit no. 3


Key Point: Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PC(PLC) link function.


Link area allocation - Link relay allocation

System registers


No. 40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 64 64 64 No. 42 Start address of link relay send area 0 20 40 No. 43 Size of link relay send area 20 20 24

- Link register allocation

System registers


No. 41 Range of link registers used for PC(PLC) link

128 128 128

No. 44 Start address of link register send area 0 40 80 No. 45 Size of link register send area 40 40 48

Setting the largest unit number

No. Name Set value No. 47 Largest unit number setting for PC(PLC) link 3


Connection diagram <AFPG803>

<AFPG806> In case of using the AFPG806, connect two cables each to the (+) terminal and (-) terminal. Use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which should be 0.5 to 0.75 mm2. The terminal station is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette.


Sample program - Unit no. 1 When X1 is input, L0 of the link relay goes on, and when X2 is input, L1 of the link relay goes on.

- Unit no. 2 When L0 of the link relay goes on, Y0 is output.

- Unit no. 3 When L1 of the link relay goes on, Y1 is output.


7.6.5 PC(PLC) link Response Time

The maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula.

The various items in the formula are calculated as described below. Ts (transmission time per station) Ts = scan time + Tpc (PC(PLC) link sending time) Tpc = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Pcm (PC(PLC) link sending size) Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps Pcm = 23 + (number of relay words + number of register words) x 4 Tlt (link table sending time) Tlt = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Ltm (link table sending size) Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps Ltm = 13 + 2 x n (n = number of stations being added) Tso (master station scan time) This should be confirmed using the programming tool. Tlk (link addition processing time) …. If no stations are being added, Tlk = 0. Tlk = Tlc (link addition command sending time) + Twt (addition waiting time) + Tls (sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs) + Tso (master station scan time) Tlc = 10 x Ttx (sending time per byte) Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps Twt = Initial value 400 ms (can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction) Tls = 7 x Ttx (sending time per byte) Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115. 2 kbps Tso = Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms. Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms Each Ts = 1 + 6.82 = 7.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be: T max. = 7.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 1 = 130.44 ms


Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be: T max. = 11.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 5 = 198.44 ms


Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and registers have been allocated evenly, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms. Ttx = 0.096 Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 15) ≒ 4.13 ms Tlk = 0.96 + 400 + 0.67 + 5 ≒407 ms Note: The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms. Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be: T max. = 11.82 x 15 + 4.13 + 5 + 407 = 593.43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8-unit link, the largest station number is 8, relays and register have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms. Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (8 + 16) x 4 = 119 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 119 ≒ 11.43 ms Each Ts = 5 + 11.43 = 16.43 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 8) ≒ 2.79 ms Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be: T max. = 16.43 x 8 + 2.79 + 5 = 139.23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, relays and registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms. Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (32 + 64) x 4 = 407 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 407 ≒ 39.072 ms Each Ts = 5 + 39.072 = 44.072 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 2) ≒ 1.632 ms Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be: T max. = 44.072 x 2 + 1.632 + 5 = 94.776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms. Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (1 + 1) x 4 = 31 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 31 ≒ 2.976 ms Each Ts = 1 + 2.976 = 3.976 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 2) ≒ 1.632 ms Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be: T max. = 3.976 x 2 + 1.632 + 1 = 10.584 ms

Note: • In the description, “stations that have been added” refers to stations which are connected between

station no. 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on. • Comparing examples 2 and 3, the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not

been added to the link. As a result the PC(PLC) link response time is longer. • The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or

more stations that have not been added to the link.


Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added If there are stations that have not been added to the link, the Tlk time (link addition processing time) and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer.

With the SYS1 instruction, the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced. Thus, SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time. <Programming example of SYS1 instruction> (SYS1, M PCLK1T0, 100) Note)

Function: Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC(PLC) link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms. Keywords: Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T0 Permissible range for key word no. 2: 10 to 400 (10 ms to 400 ms) Note) Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right. If the second keyword is 2 digits, put 2 spaces, and if it is 3 digits, put one space.

Note: If there are any stations that have not been added to the link, the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem. • The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The

same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs. • The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs

connected to the link. • If a short waiting time has been set, there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their

power supply is on. (The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms.)


Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off, it takes (as a default value) 6.4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations. This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction. <Programming example of SYS1 instruction> (SYS1, M PCLK1T1, 100) Note)

Function: Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC(PLC) link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms. Keywords: Setting for key word no. 1: PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no. 2: 100 to 6400 (100 ms to 6400 ms) Note) Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right. If the second keyword is 3 digits, put 2 spaces, and if it is 4 digits, no space is needed.

Note: The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems. • The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The

same time should be set for all linked PLCs. • The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the

PLCs are connected to the link. • If short time has been set, the transmission assurance relay may not function properly. (The shortest

time that can be set is 100 ms.)


7.7 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU Communication

7.7.1 MODBUS RTU Communication

Function overview • This function is available for the 32k type only. • The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FPΣ and other devices (including

our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit). • Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave

units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions. • Enables the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave

function is equipped. About MODBUS RTU • The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave

units communicating between them. • There are ASCII mode and RTU (binary) mode in the MODBUS protocol, however, the FPΣ is

supported with the RTU (binary) mode only. Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV) instructions. Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.

Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response message corresponding to the content. Do not execute the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit.


MODBUS RTU command message frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END

3.5-character time 8 bits 8 bits n*8 bits 16 bits 3.5-character time ADDRESS (Unit No.) 8 bits, 0 to 99 (decimal) Note1) 0= Broadcast address Note2) Slave unit No. is 1 to 99 (decimal) Note3) For MODBUS, 0 to 247 (decimal) FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Varies depending on commands. CRC 16 bits END 3.5-character time (Differs depending on baud rate. Refer to reception judgement time.) Response in normal status The same message as a command is returned for single write command. A part of a command message (6 bytes from the beginning) is returned for multiple write command. Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command (except transmission error) Slave address (unit number) Function code + 80H Error code CRC

One of either 1, 2 or 3

Error code contents 1: Function code error 2: Device number error (out of range) 3: Device quantity error (out of range)

Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received. Baud rate Reception done judgment time 2400 Approx. 13.3 ms 4800 Approx. 6.7 ms 9600 Approx. 3.3 ms 19200 Approx. 1.7 ms 38400 Approx. 0.8 ms 57600 Approx. 0.6 ms 115200 Approx. 0.3 ms

Note) The reception done judgment time is an approx. 32-bit time.


Supported commands Executable instructions for master

Code (decimal)

Name (MODBUS original) Name for FPΣ Remarks

(Reference No.)

F146 (RECV) 01 Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils 0X F146 (RECV) 02 Read Input Status Read X Input 1X F146 (RECV) 03 Read Holding Registers Read DT 4X F146 (RECV) 04 Read Input Registers Read WL and LD 3X F145 (SEND) 05 Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X F145 (SEND) 06 Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4X Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics Loopback Test F145 (SEND) 15 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys

and Rs 0X

F145 (SEND) 16 Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple Words

4X

Cannot be issued 22 Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask 4X Cannot be issued 23 Read/Write 4X Registers Read/Write DT 4X

Table for MODBUS reference No. and FPΣ device No.

MODBUS reference No. Data on BUS (hexadecimal) FPΣ device No.

Coil 000001-001184 0000-049F Y0-Y73F 002049-006144 0800-17FF R0-R255F

Input 100001-101184 0000-049F X0-X73F Holding register Note) 400001-432765 0000-7FFC DT0-DT32764

Input register 300001-300128 0000-007F WL0-WL127 302001-302256 07D0-08CF LD0-LD255


Setting using FPWIN GR 1. Change the display to the “Online monitor” by selecting “Online Edit Mode” under “Online” in the menubar or pressing [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time. 2. Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM Port”. There areseparate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 .

Dialog box of MODBUS RTU setting

Reference: <MODBUS RTU Specifications> It can be downloaded from our website.


Sample program for MODBUS master Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MODBUS master function.

Reference: For the information on the F145(SEND) and F146(RECV) instructions, <Programming Manual ARCT1F313E>


Flow chart

The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly. 1. Updates the write data if the write data (DT50 and DT51) and the read data (DT60 and DT61) are matched. 2. Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DT0 and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the

COM1 port. 3. Reads the data DT0 and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from

the COM1 port. Note) The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port.


Chapter 8 Security Functions


8.1 Type of Security Functions There are mainly two functions as the security function of the FPΣ. It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used. 1: Password protect function It is used to restrict the access to the programs in the FPΣ from the programming tool by setting a password. Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by setting a password and setting to the protect mode. There are two types of passwords as below. • 4-digit password: 4 characters of 16 characters that are “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be used. • 8-digit password: A maximum of 8 English one byte characters (case-sensitive) and symbols can be used. Note) 8-digit password is available for FPΣ 32k type only. 2: Upload protection (Available for FPΣ 32k type only) Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FPΣ by setting that the program is not uploaded. As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the programming tool will be unperformable, it ensures higher security. 3: Password protect function and upload protection for FP memory loader Those functions are available only when using the 32k-type FPΣ V3.2 or later, FP memory loader V2.0 or later and FPWIN GR V2.8 or later and when setting a 8-digit password.

Reference: <8.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader> The state of the security can be checked at two displays of the programming tool FPWIN GR. 1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen. 2. Select “Security information” or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following displays will be shown. Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box


8.2 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FPΣ. There are two ways to set a password as below. 1. Sets using the programming tool. 2. Sets using an instruction (SYS1 instruction).

Note: Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you cannot read programs. (Even if you ask us for your password, we cannot crack it.)


8.2.1 Password Setting For FPΣ 32k Type Only

Setting using FPWIN GR 1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen. 2. Select or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown. Security information dialog box

Indicates the current status of the password setting. Specify the type of the password to be used. Specify an operation mode.

Access: Accesses programs by inputting a password.

Protect: Sets a password. Unprotect: Releases the password setting.

Input a password. Optional setting for FP memory loader Use the FPΣ V3.2 or later and FPWIN GR V2.8 or later, and set it to download to the FP memory loader (Ver2.0 or later).

Confirmation the contents of the password setting Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box. Current status Indicates the current status of the password setting. There are following five statuses. 1. Password is not set : Password is not set. 2. 4 digits Protect : Password is 4-digit password, and access is prohibited. 3. 4 digits Available to access : Password is 4-digit password, and access is allowed. (The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs.) 4. 8 digits Protect : Password is 8-digit password, and access is prohibited. 5. 8 digits Available to access : Password is 8-digit password, and access is allowed. (The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs.) Available retry counts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession. Every time incorrect password is input, the number will decrease (up to 3 times). If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession, you cannot access the program. Turn the power supply of the FP∑ off and then on again to try to input the password again.

Note: If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will be that the PLC is protected again.


Setting the Password protect function

As the dialog box is shown, select as below. Digit number: Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”. Operation Mode: Select “Protect”. 4 digits (or 8 digits) password: Input a password to be set. Click “Settings”.

Input the password for confirmation again, and click [OK].

The setting has completed.

Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password

As the dialog box is shown, select as below. Digit number: Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”. Operation Mode: Select “Access”. 4 digits (or 8 digits) password: Input a password to be set. Click “Settings”.




How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting. Description Program Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified. All programs are retained.

Force cancel Erases all programs and security information to cancel the setting forcibly.

All programs are deleted. (The upload protection setting is also deleted.)

Releasing the protect of PLC (Programs are retained.)

As the dialog box is shown, select as below. Digit number: Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”. Operation Mode: Select “Unprotect”. 4 digits (or 8 digits) password: Input a password to be set. Click “Settings”.

Click [OK].

Note) The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed. Executing the force cancel (Programs and security information are all deleted.)

Click [Force cancel].

Click [Yes].


If the current status is “Password is not set”, this procedure has completed. All programs and security information were deleted.

8.2.2 Password Setting For FPΣ 12k Type Only

The following functions are not available for the FPΣ 16k type. 1. 8-digit password 2. Function to display the current state of a password Setting the Password protect function

As the dialog box is shown, select as below. Operation Mode: Select “Protect”. 4 digits password: Input a password to be set. Click “Settings”.

Input the password for confirmation again, and click [OK].



Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password

As the dialog box is shown, select as below. Operation Mode: Select “Access”. 4 digits password: Input a password to be set. Click “Settings”.




How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting.

Description Program Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified. All programs are retained.

Force cancel Erases all programs and security information to cancel the setting forcibly.

All programs are deleted. (The upload protection setting is also deleted.)

Releasing the protect of PLC (Programs are retained.)

As the dialog box is shown, select as below. Operation Mode: Select “Unprotect”. 4 digits password: Input a password to be set. Click “Settings”.

Click [OK].

Note) The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed. Executing the force cancel (Programs and security information are all deleted.)

Click [Force cancel].

Click [Yes].

Click [Yes]. This operation may take a long time depending on the baud rate, performance of a PC or password data.

All programs and security information were deleted.


8.3 Upload Protection FPΣ 32k Type Only This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading. If setting to prohibit program uploading, note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be uploaded after that. However, editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool. Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched. When using this function, store ladder programs as files without fail. Unperformable operations on the FPΣ set to prohibit uploading 1. Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs 2. Transferring programs to FP memory loader The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool, however, all ladder programs, system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled.

Note: When cancelling this setting forcibly: All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled. We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us. We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading. Keeping your programs is your responsibility. Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified for the FPΣ that this function is set at the same time. Also, this function can be specified for the FPΣ that a password is set.

8.3.1 Upload Protection Setting

Use the programming tool to set the upload protection on the control unit. 1. Set in the control unit using the programming tool. 2. Specify the information on the upload protection in the master memory cassette, and set in the control unit. Setting using FPWIN GR 1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen. 2. Select or “Upload settings” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.

Select “Set that PLC cannot be uploaded”. Click “Execute”.


8.4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following three functions of the FP memory loader (AFP8670/AFP8671) can be set through the FPΣ. The setting will be effective when it is transferred to another FPΣ after the upload to the FP memory loader from the set FPΣ. Setting conditions - 32k-type FPΣ V3.2 or later - FP memory loader V2.0 or later - FPWIN GR V2.8 or later - 8-digit password is set.

8.4.1 Download Protection Setting to Previous Versions (Allow the download to older than Version 3.2)

This is a function to disable the download from the FPΣ V3.2 or later to the FPΣ older than V3.2 for enhanced security. When setting the download to be enabled, the download can be performed regardless of the version of FPΣ, however, the limited distribution and upload protection settings cannot be used.

8.4.2 Limited Distribution Function (Allow the download in case of same password)

When downloading a program from the memory loader, the program can be downloaded only when the program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled.

Note: This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FPΣ older than V3.2 has not been made.


8.4.3 Upload Protection Setting Function (Set that PLC cannot be uploaded)

If this function is valid, the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader.

Note: This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FPΣ older than V3.2 has not been made.


8.4.4 Version Check List

Version check list State of target PLC to be written PLC

version to be written

Password 4 digits 8 digits 8 digits

Program in FP memory loader Not set Protected Protected

Protected Note4)

FPΣ 32K All versions

- No password or - 4-digit or 8-digit password

V3.11 or older

Note3)

V3.20 or later

Note1)

FPΣ 32K Ver3.20 or later

- 8-digit password and - Download prohibition to old ver.

V3.11 or older

V3.20 or later

Note1)

Note1)

Note1)

- 8-digit password and - Download protection to old ver. and - Download permission only for models with same password.

V3.11 or older

V3.20 or later

Note1)

- 8-digit password and - Download protection to old ver. and - Upload protection

V3.11 or older

V3.20 or later

Note1)

Note1)

Note1)

Note2)

- 8-digit password and - Download protection to old ver. and - Download permission only for models with same password and - Upload protection

V3.11 or older

V3.20 or later

Note5)

Note5)

Note1)

FPΣ 12K - No password or - 4-digit

- - -

: Download possible : Download possible only for models with same password : Download impossible -: No target model

Note1) Program downloading is not possible for FP memory loader Ver.1.*. Note2) Upload protection cannot be set for FP memory loader Ver.1.*. Note3) When downloading programs with 8-digit password, FP memory loader Ver.1.* will not enter

protection state after downloading finishes. To enter protection state, turn off the power and then turn it on again.

Note4) The state that the setting has been made not to disable downloading to the old version on the FPΣ Ver.3.20 or later .

Note5) When transferring data from FP memory loader to PLC, program data cannot be transferred by Ver. 2 or later, however, only the "Upload protection" setting is effective.

Status of PLC that program has been downloaded downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader, the password that has been already set on the unit may be changed. Note the followings.

Status of FP memory loader Password setting for PLC after download No password setting The password will be cleared. 4-digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 4-digit password. 8-digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 8-digit password. 8-digit password setting Limited distribution setting: Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8-digit password.

8-digit password setting Limited distribution setting: On

The password will not change. (The program itself will not be downloaded.)


8.4.5 Setting using FPWIN GR

1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen. 2. Select or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. The following display will be shown.

1. Select "8 digits" for "Digit number". 2. Uncheck "Allow the download to older

than Version 3.2" in "Setting for FP memory loader option".

3. Check the functions to be used of

"Options for FP memory loader". - Limited distribution function

→ ”Allow the download in case of same password” - Enable the upload protection setting.

→ ”Set that PLC cannot be uploaded” 4. After setting the above check box, input a

8-digit password, and then click "Setting". The setting has completed.

Note) This function is available only when

the version of FPΣ is Ver3.2 or later and a 8-digit password has been set.


8.5 Table of Security Settings/Cancel When setting the security on FPΣ control unit

Status of security

Security not set

Upload protection

4-digit password

8-digit password

Sets/ Cancels

Upload protection A A A 4-digit password A A N/A 8-digit password A A N/A

A: Available, N/A: Not available

Note: The following functions are not available for the FPΣ 12k type. 8-digit password Upload protection



Chapter 9 Other Functions


9.1 P13 (ICWT) Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built-in ROM (F-ROM data area) control unit using the P13 (ICWT) instruction. However, note the followings for the use: 1. Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times. If writing continues for more than that, the correct operation cannot be guaranteed. 2. The power supply turns off when the P13 (ICWT) instruction is being executed. If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed, the hold type area may not be kept. (Also, when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode, the same event may occur.)


9.2 Sampling Trace Function 32k Type Only

9.2.1 Overview

The FPΣ control unit Ver3.10 and later versions support the sampling trace function. Using this function enables to take samplings and record (accumulate) the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits + 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing, and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing. The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the FPWIN GR. The instructions, functions, special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below. F155(SMPL) sampling instruction F156(STRG) sampling stop trigger instruction Time charge monitor of FPWIN GR R902C : Sample point flag OFF=Sampling by instruction ON=Sampling at regular time intervals R902D : Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts=0 stops=1 R902E : Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on. R902F : Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts. DT90028 : Interval of sampling trace k0=For sampling by instruction k1 to k3000 (10ms to 30 seconds) For sampling at regular time intervals

9.2.2 Details of Sampling Trace Function

No. of data collectable at one sampling: 16 bits +3 data Sampling capacity (No. of samples accumulable) : 1000 samples Types of sampling timing (When an instruction is executed, or at regular time intervals) 1: Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2: Sampling by F155(SMPL) instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction. Also, more than one samplings can be executed in one scan. Timing for the execution of the F155(SMPL) instruction can be set by the ladder sequence.

Note: It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155(SMPL) instruction simultaneously.

How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger (request): Following two methods are available. 1. Deactivate request by the tool software 2. Deactivate request by the F156(STRG) instruction If the stop trigger activates, the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified No. of delay, and then stop the sampling operation. Once the sampling operation stops, the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart. It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the No. of delay.


Operation image of sampling trace

9.2.3 How to Use Sampling Trace

1. Sampling at regular time intervals (1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR. (2) Specify the sampling configurations.

Set the mode of the sampling configurations to “Trace”. Set the sampling rate (time).


(3) Start monitoring. Start with the button.

2. Sampling by instruction (1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR. (2) Specify the sampling configurations.

Set the mode of the sampling configurations to “Trace”. Set the sampling rate (time) to 0.

3. Read data by trigger (1) Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2

on the time chart display of FPWIN GR. The data will be indicated in the time chart. Stop monitoring. (Stop with the button, stop by the “Trigger Break” in the menu, or stop by the F156 instruction.)

Reference: <FPWIN GR Help>



Chapter 10 Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting


10.1 Self-Diagnostic function

10.1.1 LED Display for Status Condition

Status indicator LEDs on control unit

LED status

Description Operation status RUN PROG. ERROR/

ALARM

Normal condition

Light (on) Off Off Normal operation Operation Off Light (on) Off PROG. mode Stop Flashes Flashes Off Forcing on/off in Run mode Operation

Abnormal condition

Light (on) Off Flashes When a self-diagnostic error occurs

Operation

Off Light (on) Flashes When a self-diagnostic error occurs

Stop

Light (on) System watchdog timer has been activated

Stop

• The control unit has a self-diagnostic function which

identifies errors and stops operation if necessary. • When an error occurs, the status of the status indicator

LEDs on the control unit vary, as shown in the table above.

10.1.2 Operation on Error

• Normally, when an error occurs, the operation stops. • The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped when a duplicated output error or

operation error occurs, by setting the system registers. You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below.

“PLC System Register” setting menu on programming tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs, select “PLC System Register setting” under “Option” on the menu bar, and click on the “Action on Error” tab. The screen shown below is displayed.

[Example1]: When allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No. 20. When operation is resumed, it will not be handled as an error. [Example2]: When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No. 26. When operation is resumed, it will be continued, but will be handled as an error.


10.2 Troubleshooting

10.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is Flashing

Condition: The self-diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents (error code) using the programming tool. Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR Ver. 2, if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG. mode, the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically. Check the contents of the self-diagnosed error. Status display dialog box

If the error is an operation error, the error address can be confirmed in this dialog box. After correcting the error, click on the “Clear Error” button to clear the error.

Key Point: To display the status display dialog box, select “Status Display” under “Online” on the menu bar. Procedure 2 <For error code is 1 to 9> • Condition

There is a syntax error in the program. • Operation 1

Change to PROG. mode and clear the error. • Operation 2

Execute a total-check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error.


<For error code is 20 or higher> • Condition

A self-diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred. • Operation 1

Use the programming tool in PROG. mode to clear the error. Using FPWIN GR Click on the “Clear Error” button in the “Status display dialog box”. Error code 43 and higher can be cleared. • In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error, but all of

the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared. • An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR).

Key Point: When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. If this happens, click on the “Operation Err” button in the “Status display dialog box” and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error.

10.2.2 If ERROR/ALARM LED is ON

Condition: The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated. Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG. mode and turn the power off and then on. • If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on again, there is probably an abnormality in the FPΣ control unit.

Please contact your dealer. • If the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashed, go to chapter 8.2.1. Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode. • If the ERROR/ALARM LED is turned on, the program execution time is too long. Check the program. Check (1)Check if instructions such as “JMP” or “LOOP” are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish. (2)Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession.


10.2.3 ALL LEDs are OFF

Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply. Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FPΣ control unit is in the range of the rating. • Be sure to check the fluctuation in the voltage. Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FPΣ control unit is shared with them. • If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment, increase the capacity of the power supply or

prepare another power supply for other devices. • Please contact your dealer for further questions.


10.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction

Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side. Check of output condition 1: Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads. Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads. • If the power is properly supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the load. Check the

load again. • If the power is not supplied to the load, there is probably an abnormality in the output section. Please

contact your dealer. Check of output condition 2: Output indicator LEDS are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool. • If the output monitored is turned on, there is probably a duplicated output error. Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input/output function. • If the output indicator LED is turned on, go to input condition check. • If the output indicator LED remains off, there is probably an abnormality in the output unit. Please

contact your dealer. Check of input condition 1: Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices. Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals. • If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input unit.

Please contact your dealer. • If the power is not supplied to the input terminal, there is probably an abnormality in the input device or

input power supply. Check the input device and input power supply. Check of input condition 2: Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool. • If the input monitored is off, there is probably an abnormality with the input unit. Please contact your

dealer. • If the input monitored is on, check the leakage current at the input devices (e.g., two-wire type sensor)

and check the program again. Check (1)Check for the duplicated use of output and for the output using the high-level instruction. (2)Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used.


10.2.5 A Protect Error Message Appears

When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the “Set PLC Password” menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the “Access” radio button. Using FPWIN GR (1)Select “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar. (2)The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Turn on the radio button next to “Access”, enter a password, and click on the “Settings” button. Set PLC password dialog box

10.2.6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN

Condition: A syntax error or a self-diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred. Procedure 1 Check if the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing.

Reference:

If the ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing, check <10.2.1 If ERROR/ALARM LED is flashing>.

Procedure 2 Execute a total-check function to determine the location of the syntax error. Using FPWIN GR Select “Debug” on the menu bar, and select “Totally check program”. Click on the “Execute” button in the total check dialog box.


10.2.7 A Transmission Error has Occurred through RS485

Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two (+) terminals and two (−) terminals of the units, and that the final unit has been correctly connected. Procedure 2 Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range. At this point, make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type, and that multiple types of cables are not being used. • Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station.

Reference:

For the specifications range of the transmission cables, refer to <7.3.3 Selection of Transmission Cables>.

Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap.

10.2.8 No Communication is Available through RS232C

Condition: No communication with 1-channel type RS232C cassette Procedure 1 Check if the CS signal is on. When the “COM.2 R” of the communication cassette LED does not light, the CS signal is not on. If the three-wire type is used, connect the RS signal and the CS signal of the communication cassette, and turn the CS signal on.

Reference: <7.1.2 Types of Communication Cassette>


Chapter 11 Precautions During Programming


11.1 Use of Duplicated Output

11.1.1 Duplicated Output

What is duplicated output? • Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program. • If the same output is specified for the “OT” and “KP” instructions, it is considered to be duplicated

output. (Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions, such as the SET, RST instruction or high-level instruction (such as data transfer), it is not regarded as duplicated output.)

• If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists, it will be normally flagged as an error. (The ERROR/ALARM LED will flash and the self-diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on.)

How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool, by the following method. - Using the tool software Select the “Debug” → “Totally Check Program” in the menu bar, and click “Execute”. If there are any duplicated outputs, an error message and the address will be displayed. Enabling duplicated output • If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program, duplicated output can be

enabled. • In this case, change the setting of system register 20 to “enable”. • When this is done, an error will not occur when the program is executed.

11.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET or RST Instruction

Condition of internal and output relays during operation • When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer

instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are rewritten at each step during operation.

<Example> Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to X2 are all on).


The output is determined by the final operation results • If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST or data transfer

functions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the final results of the operation. <Example> Output to the same output relay Y0 with OT, KP, SET and RST instructions.

When X0 to X2 are all on, Y0 is output as off at I/O update. • If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update instruction

(F143).


11.2 Handling BCD Data

11.2.1 BCD Data

BCD is an acronym for binary-coded decimal, and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number. <Example> Expressing a decimal number in BCD:

11.2.2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC

• When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7-segment display (with a decoder), the data must be in BCD form. In this case, use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below.

• BCD arithmetic instructions (F40 to F58) also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data, however, it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions (F20 to F38) as operation in the PLC takes place in binary.

Input from a digital switch Use the BCD-to-BIN conversion instruction F81.

Output to a 7-segment display (with decoder) Use the BIN-to-BCD conversion instruction F80.


11.3 Handling Index Registers

11.3.1 Index Registers

• Like other registers, index registers have 14 points, I0 to ID, for reading and writing 16-bit data. • Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number. (This is also called index

modification.) <Example> Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register.

In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of I0 with DT0 acting as a base. For example, when I0 contains K10, the destination will be DT10, and when I0 is K20, the destination will be DT20. • In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction,

and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data.

11.3.2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers

• Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT. <Example> I0WX0, I0WY1, I0WR0, I0SV0, I0EV2, I0DT100

• Constants can also be modified. <Example> I0K10, I0H1001

• An index register cannot modify another index register. <Example> I0I0, I0I1

• When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32-bit data, specify with I0. In this case, I0 and I1 are handled together as 32-bit data.


11.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register

Repeatedly reading in external data <Example> Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DT0.

When R0 turns on, 0 is written to index register I0. When the R1 turns on, the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by

I0DT0. Add 1 to I0. In this case, the contents of I0 will change successively, and the destination data register

will be as follows. Input times of R1 Contents of I0 Destination data register

1st 2nd 3rd

:

0 1 2 :

DT0 DT1 DT2

: Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input <Example 1> Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch

Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0. Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified

by contents of I0. <Example 2> Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch

Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0. Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by I0 to BCD, and output it to output relay

WY0.


11.4 Operation Errors

11.4.1 Outline of Operation Errors

• An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high-level instruction is executed.

• When an operation error occurs, the ERROR/ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the operation error flags (R9007 and R9008) will turn on.

• The operation error code “E45” is set at special data register DT90000. • The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. Types of operation error 1. Address error The memory address (number) specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used. 2. BCD data error Operation is attempted on non-BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed, or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range. 3. Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data, the specified data is outside the possible range. 4. Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range.

11.4.2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs

• Normally, the operation stops when an operation error occurs. • When you set system register 26 to “continuation”, the control unit operates even if an operation error

occurs. Using programming tool software 1. Set the mode of the CPU to PROG. 2. Select the “Option” in “PLC Configuration” option from the menu bar. 3. On the “PLC Configuration” menu, select “Action on error”. This displays system registers 20 to 26. 4. Remove the check of system register 26. 5. Press the “OK” to write the setting to the PLC.

11.4.3 Dealing with Operation Errors

<Procedure> 1. Check the location of the error. Check the address where the error occurred, which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018, and make sure the high-level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate. 2. Clear the error. Use a programming tool to clear the error. • Select “Online” → “Status Display” in the menu bar. Execute “Clear Error”. • An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode, however, the contents of the

operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared. • An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction (F148). • If the mode selector is set to “RUN”, RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared. So if the cause of

the error is not removed, the error may seem not to be cleared.


11.4.4 Points to Check in Program

1. Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register. <Example> When a data register is modified using an index register

In this case, index register modifies the address of data register DT0. If data in I0 is too large, it will exceed the addressable range of the data register. The last address of the data register is DT32764, so if the contents of I0 exceeds 32764, an operation error will occur. The same is true when the contents of I0 are a negative value. 2. Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD ↔ BIN data conversion? <Example> When BCD-to-BIN conversion is attempted

In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4, conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result. <Example> When BIN-to-BCD conversion is attempted

In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999, an operation error will occur. 3. Check if the divisor of a division instruction is “0”. <Example>

In this case, if the content of DT100 is “0”, an operation error will occur.


11.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method

11.5.1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method

Instructions using the leading edge detection operation 1. DF (leading edge differential) instructions 2. Count input for CT (counter) instructions 3. Count input for F118 (UDC up-down counter) instructions 4. Shift input for SR (shift register) instructions 5. Shift input for F119 (LRSR left-right shift register) instructions 6. NSTP (next step) instructions 7. Differential execution type high-level instruction (P13) Leading edge detection method • An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger

(execution condition) is detected switching from off to on. (1) Standard operation

(2) Leading edge detection operation

How to perform leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared, and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on. In any other case, the instruction is not executed. Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection • When RUN begins, for example when the system is powered on, the off → on change of the execution

condition (trigger) is not detected. The instruction is not executed. Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page.

• When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of execution of instructions, the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.

Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions, such as: 1. MC and MCE instructions 2. JP and LBL instructions 3. LOOP and LBL instructions 4. CNDE instruction 5. Step ladder instructions 6. Subroutine instructions


11.5.2 Operation and Precautions When RUN Starts

Operation of first scan after RUN begins • The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN

mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if the trigger (execution condition) is already on.

• If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior to switching to

RUN mode, make a program as below using R9014 (initial pulse off relay). (R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan.)

<Example 1> DF (leading edge differential) instruction

<Example 2> CT (counter) instruction


11.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction

• If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction, it will be executed only under the following condition: The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the previous control instruction was reset, and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on.

• When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.

<Example 1> Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions


<Example 2> Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions


11.6 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly Do not write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly. <Example 1>

• When X1 was on prior to X0, Y0 will not be on even if X0 becomes on. <Example 2>

• TMX will activate if X1 becomes on whether X0 is on or off. <Example 3>

• When X2 was on prior to X0, Y1 will not be on even if X0 becomes on. When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a differential instruction (DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS) instruction, read stack (RDS) instruction, or pop stack (POPS) instruction. Examples in which the above programs are rewritten <Program in which the example 1 is rewritten>

<Program in which the example 2 is rewritten>

<Program in which the example 3 is rewritten>


11.7 Rewrite Function During RUN

11.7.1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN

How operation of rewrite during RUN Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode. When a rewrite is attempted during RUN, the tool service time is temporarily extended, program rewriting is performed, and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode. For this reason, the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms. Operation during rewrite External output (Y) is held. External input (X) is ignored. The timer (T) stops the clock. Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions (DF), counter instructions (CT), and left/right shift registers are ignored. Interrupt functions are stopped. Internal clock relays (special internal relays) are also stopped. Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite. Set values for timer/counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants (K) in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas (SV). Values in the elapsed value area (EV) do not change. Operation of rewrite during RUN completed flag The rewrite during RUN completed flag (R9034) is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode. It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program.


11.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible

When the timeout error message is indicated: Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.

1. When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left, set it to the offline edit mode. Complete the program conversion in the tool software, and then change to the online edit mode to check. 2. When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared. Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again. After the operation, change to the online edit mode to check. When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display. Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN. (The default setting is 5 seconds.)

Select “Transfer” from “File” in the menu bar. The “transfer data” screen will open. Select “Condition” to open “Communication Setting” screen. Change the value for “Timeout”. Click “OK” button to complete the change of setting.


Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1. When the result of rewriting is a syntax error. <Example> When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions. 1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE) 2. Suroutine instructions (SUB/RET) 3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET) 4. JP/LBL 5. LOOP/LBL 6. MC/MCE Also, rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors. 2. During the forced input/output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt, high-speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do not perform a rewrite during RUN. If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the operation as below will be performed. Exercise caution. 1. Interrupt programs will be disabled. Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again. <Example> Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)

2. The high-speed counter will continue to count. Target value match on/off instructions (F166/F167) will continue. Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166/F167 instruction is running. 3. The pulse output/PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed. The operation after the completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction.

Instruction number

Name Operation after the completion of rewriting during RUN

F171 (SPDH) Pulse output (Trapezoidal control) The operation before rewriting continues. F171 (SPDH) Pulse output (Home position return) The operation before rewriting continues. F172 (PLSH) Pulse output (JOG operation) Stop F173 (PWMH) PWM output Stop

F174 (SP0H) Pulse output (Selectable data table control operation)

The operation before rewriting continues.

F175 (SPSH) Pulse output (Linear interpolation) The operation before rewriting continues.

F176 (SPCH) Pulse output (Circular interpolation) Rewriting during RUN cannot be performed.

4. The regular sampling trace will not stop.


11.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN

Item FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode

FPWIN GR Boolean mode

Rewrite procedure

Maximum of 128 steps. Changes are performed by block. When PG conversion is executed online, the program will be rewritten.

Rewriting performed by step. Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change.

Operation of each instruction

OT/KP

If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b, the condition before the rewrite will be held.

If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b, the condition before the rewrite will be held. Y contact relays which are on bill be held in the on status. To turn them off in the RUN mode, use forced output.

TM/CT

• If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b, the condition before the rewrite will be held.

• Set values specified by K constants in TM/CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV’s in the program. (Elapsed values EV do not change.)

• If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b, the condition before the rewrite will be held.

• Set values specified by K constants in TM/CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV’s in the program. (Elapsed values EV do not change.)

Fun High-level instructions

If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b, the condition before the rewrite will be held.

• If deleted, the output memory area will be held.

MC/MCE

When writing MC/MCE instructions, be sure to write the instructions as a pair.

Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible. Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode.

CALL/SUB/ RET

A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions. Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction.

Write in the order: RET, SUB, CALL Delete in the order: CALL, SUB, RET

INT/IRET

An interrupt program is an program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions. Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction.

Write in the order: IRET, INT Delete in the order: INT, IRET


Item FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode

FPWIN GR Boolean mode

Operation of each instruction

SSTP/STPE

A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice. An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram.

Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area. Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode. In the case of an SSTP instruction only, writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area.

JP/LOOP/ LBL

Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL-LOOP instructions.

Write in the order: JP-LBL or LOOP-LBL Delete in the order: LBL-JP or LBL-LOOP


11.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output

11.8.1 Processing when forced input/output is initiated during RUN

1. Processing of external input (X) • Regardless of the state of the input from the input device, forced on/off operation will take precedence

at a contact specified for forced input/output in the above procedure B. At this time, the input LED will not blink, however, the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten.

• Contacts not specified will read in the on/off state according to the condition of the input from the input device.

2. Processing of external output (Y) • Regardless of the result of operation, forced on/off will take precedence at a contact specified for

forced input/output in the above procedure A. At this time, the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten. External output will take place according to the input/output update timing in the above diagram.

• The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result. 3. Processing of Timer (T) and Counter (C) • Regardless of the timer/counter input condition, forced on/off operation will take precedence at a

contact specified for forced input/output. At this time, the contact of the timer (T) or counter (C) in the operation memory will be rewritten. Timing and counting will not take place during control.

• The on/off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result. Operation during operation For small-sized PLCs FP0, FP1, FPΣ and FP-X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of operation. However, as the R or Y is set/reset again right before the peripheral service (as the above procedure C), the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value. For medium-sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction, the value of the forced processing has a priority. When rewritten by a high-level instruction, the result of the instruction has a priority.



Chapter 12 Specifications


12.1 Table of Specifications

12.1.1 General Specifications

Item Description Rated operating voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4V DC

Allowed momentary power off time

C32 C28 4ms at 21.6V, 7ms at 24V, 10ms at 26.4V

C24 3ms at 21.6V, 5ms at 24V, 8ms at 26.4V Ambient temperature 0 to +55 °C Storage temperature −20 to +70°C Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (at25°C non-condensing) Storage humidity 30 to 85%RH (at25°C non-condensing)

Breakdown voltage

C32 C28

Between input/output terminals and power supply terminal/function earth 500VAC for

1 minute Note) Between input terminal and output terminal

C24

Between input terminals (X0 to X7)/input terminals (X8 to XF) and power supply terminal/function earth

500VAC for 1 minute Note)

Between output terminals and power supply terminal/function earth


Between input terminals (X0 to X7) and input terminals (X8 to XF)


Between input terminals (X0 to X7)/input terminals (X8 to XF) and output terminals


Insulation resistance

C32 Between input/output terminals and power supply terminal/function earth

Min. 100MΩ (measured with a 500V DC megger)

C28 Between input terminal and output terminal

C24

Between input terminals (X0 to X7)/input terminals (X8 to XF) and power supply terminal/function earth Between output terminals and power supply terminal/function earth Between input terminals (X0 to X7) and input terminals (X8 to XF) Between input terminals (X0 to X7)/input terminals (X8 to XF) and output terminals

Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1 cycle/min, double amplitude of 0.75 mm, 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m/s2, 4 times on 3 axes

Noise immunity 1000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1µs (based on in-house measurements

Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Note) Cutoff current : 10 mA However, excluding varister for protection. (Factory default setting value)


Weight Unit type Part No. Weight

FPΣ control unit FPG-C32/C28 Approx. 120g FPG-C24 Approx. 140g

FPΣ expansion unit

FPG-XY64D2T FPG-XY64D2P

Approx. 100g

FPG-PP11/PP12 Approx. 75g FPG-PP21/PP22 Approx. 80g FPG-PN2AN/PN4AN/PN8AN Approx. 90g FPG-EM1 Approx. 80g FPG-CCLS Approx. 90g FPG-SL Approx. 85g

FP0 expansion units

FP0-E8X Approx. 65g FP0-E8R/E8YR Approx. 90g FP0-E8YT/E8YP Approx. 65g FP0-E16R Approx. 105g FP0-E16T/E16P/E 16X/E16YT/E16YP

Approx. 70g

FP0-E32T/E32P Approx. 85g FP0-A21 Approx. 80g FP0-A80 Approx. 90g FP0-IOL FP0-TC4

Approx. 85g

FP0-TC8 Approx. 95g FP0-CCLS Approx. 80g FP0-A04V/A04I/RTD6 Approx. 75g


Unit’s current consumption table

Control unit current consumption

Expansion unit current consumption

Input circuit current consumption

Output circuit current consumption

This is the current consumed form the control unit power supply connector. If expansion units or high-performance units are added, the current is increased by the value indicated below.

This is the current consumed from the expansion unit power supply connector. If a unit is not listed below, it means that it has no power supply connector

This is the current consumed by the input circuits of the various units. This value indicates the current that flows into the input circuit.

This is the current consumed by the output circuits of the various units. This value indicates the current used to drive the output circuits. This value does not include the load current value.

FPΣ control unit

FPG-C32 FPG-C28 90mA or less − 77.2mA or less 70mA or less

FPG-C24 160mA or less − 77.2mA or less None FPΣ expansion unit

FPG-XY64D2T FPG-XY64D2P 35mA or less − 112mA or less 15mA or less

FPΣ intelligent unit

FPG-PP11 FPG-PP12 50mA or less 20mA or less − −

FPG-PP21 FPG-PP22 70mA or less 35mA or less − −

FPG-PN2AN FPG-PN4AN FPG-PN8AN

90mA or less − − −

FPG-EM1 35mA or less − − − FPG-CCLS 40mA or less 40mA or less − − FPG-SL 40mA or less − − −

FP0 expan-sion unit

FP0-E8X 10mA or less 34.4mA or less − FP0-E8R 15mA or less 50mA or less 17.2mA or less − FP0-E8YR 10mA or less 100mA or less − − FP0-E8YT/P 15mA or less − − 24mA or less FP0-E16X 20mA or less − 68.8mA or less − FP0-E16R 20mA or less 100mA or less 34.4mA or less − FP0-E16T/P 25mA or less − 34.4ma or less 24mA or less FP0-E16YT/P 25mA or less − − 48mA or less FP0-E32T/P 40mA or less − 68.8mA or less 48mA or less

FP0 intelligent unit

FP0-A21 20mA or less 100mA or less − − FP0-A80 20mA or less 60mA or less − − FP0-A04V 20mA or less 100mA or less − − FP0-A04I 20mA or less 130mA or less − − FP0-TC4/C8/RTD6 25mA or less − − − FP0-IOL 30mA or less 40mA or less − − FP0-CCLS 40mA or less 40mA or less − −

Communi-cation cassette

FPG-COM1 FPG-COM2 20mA or less − − −

FPG-COM3 FPG-COM4 25mA or less − − −

Display GT01,GT01R (5 V DC, RS232C type)

80mA or less − − −

C-NET adapter S2 AFP15402 50mA or less − − −


12.1.2 Performance Specifications

FPΣ 12k type

Item Descriptions

C32T C32TTM

C32T2 C32T2TM

C24R2 C24R2TM

C28P2 C28P2TM

No. of controllable I/O points

Control unit 32 points (DC input:16, NPN output: 16)

32 points (DC input: 16, NPN output: 16)

24 points (DC input: 16, Relay output: 8)


When using FP0 expansion units

Max. 128 points (up to 3 units)


Max. 120 units (up to 3 units) *When using transistor output type expansion units


When using FPΣ expansion units

Not possible Max. 288 points (up to 4 units)

Max. 280 points (up to 4 units) *When using transistor output type expansion units

Max. 284 points (up to 4 units) *When using NPN output type expansion units

When using FP0 and FPΣ expansion units

−

Max. 384 points (up to FP0 3 units and FPΣ 4 units)

Max. 376 points (up to FP0 3 units and FPΣ 4 units) *When using transistor output type expansion units

Max. 380 points (up to FP0 3 units and FPΣ 4 units) *When using NPN output type expansion units

Programming method/Control method

Relay symbol/Cyclic operation

Program memory Built-in Flash ROM (without backup battery) Program capacity 12000 steps No. of instruction

Basic 93 High-level 216 218 216 218

Operation speed 0.4 µs/step (by basic instruction)

Ope-ration me-mory

Relay

External input (X)Note1)

512 points 1184 points

External output (Y) Note1)

512 points 1184 points

Internal relay (R)

1568 points (R0 to R97F)

Timer/ Counter (T/C)

1024 points Note2) (for initial setting, Timer: 1008 points (T0 to T1007), Counter: 16 points (C1008 to C1023)) Timer: can count up to (in units of 1ms, 10ms, 100ms or 1s)× 32767. Counter: Can count up to 1 to 32767.

Link relay(L) 1024 points

Memory area

Data register (DT)

32765 words (DT0 to DT32764)

Link register (LD)

128 words

Index register (I)

14 words (I0 to ID)


Item Descriptions

C32T C32TTM

C32T2 C32T2TM

C24R2 C24R2TM

C28P2 C28P2TM

Differential points Unlimited points Master control relay points (MCR) 256 points No. of labels (JP and LOOP) 256 points No. of step ladders 1000 stages No. of subroutines 100 subroutines Pulse catch input 8 points (X0, X1, X3, X4:5µs X2, X5 to X7: 100µs)

No. of interrupt programs 9 programs (external input 8 points X0, X1, X3, X4: 5µs X2, X5 to X7: 100µs), periodical interrupt 1 point (0.5ms to 30s)

Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, program syntax check

Calendar timer Available (year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of week) (However, this can only be used when a battery has been installed.) Note3)

Flash ROM backup Note4)

Backup by F12, P13 instructions

Data register (32765 words)

Automatic backup when power is cut off

Counter 16 points (1008 to 1023) Note6), internal relay 128 points (R900 to R97F), data register 55 words (32710 to 32764)

Battery backup Memory that is set as hold area at system register (However, only when an optional battery has been installed.) Note5)

Battery life 220 days or more (Actual usage value: approx. 840 days (25°C)) (Periodic replacement interval: 1 year) (Value applies when no power is supplied at all) Note7)

Comment storage All kinds of comments, including I/O comments, remarks and block comments can be stored.

Potentiometer (Volume) input 2 points, Resolution: 10 bits (K0 to K1000) (C32T, C32T2, C24R2, C28P2 only)

Thermister input 2 points, Resolution: 10 bits (K0 to K1000) (C32TTM, C32T2TM, C24R2TM, C28P2TM only)

PLC link function Max. 16 units, Link relay: 1024 points, Link register: 128 words

Other functions Program edition during RUN, constant scan, forced on/off, password, floating-point operation, and PID processing

Note1)The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration. Note2)The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer. Note3)Precision of calendar timer: - At 0°C: less than 119 seconds per month - At 25°C: less than 51 seconds per month - At 55°C: less than 148 seconds per month Note4)Writing is available up to 10000 times. When the optional battery is used, all areas can be backed up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. Note5)If an area is held when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the hold area will be indefinite. Note6) The contact information and the elapsed value (EV) of the counter is backed up. The setting

value (SV) is not held. Note7) The value in the table indicates the life when using the backup battery for FPΣ (AFPG804). The

life is 6 years when using a commercial battery CR123A.


FPΣ 32k type

Item Descriptions

C32TH C32THTM

C32T2H C32T2HTM

C24R2H C24R2HTM

C28P2H C28P2HTM

No. of controllable I/O points

Control unit 32 points (DC input:16, NPN output: 16)


24 points (DC input: 16, Relay output: 8)


When using FP0 expansion units



Max. 120 units (up to 3 units) *When using transistor output type expansion units


When using FPΣ expansion units

Not possible Max. 288 points (up to 4 units)

Max. 280 points (up to 4 units) *When using transistor output type expansion units

Max. 284 points (up to 4 units) *When using NPN output type expansion units

When using FP0 and FPΣ expansion units

−

Max. 384 points (up to FP0 3 units and FPΣ 4 units)

Max. 376 points (up to FP0 3 units and FPΣ 4 units) *When using transistor output type expansion units

Max. 380 points (up to FP0 3 units and FPΣ 4 units) *When using NPN output type expansion units

Programming method/Control method

Relay symbol/Cyclic operation

Program memory Built-in Flash ROM (without backup battery) Program capacity 32000 steps No. of instruction

Basic 93 High-level 216 218 216 218

Operation speed 0.32 µs/step (by basic instruction)

Ope-ration me-mory

Relay

External input (X)Note1)

1184 points

External output (Y) Note1)

1184 points

Internal relay (R)

4096 points (R0 to R255F)

Timer/ Counter (T/C)

1024 points Note2) (for initial setting, Timer: 1008 points (T0 to T1007), Counter: 16 points (C1008 to C1023)) Timer: can count up to (in units of 1ms, 10ms, 100ms or 1s)× 32767. Counter: Can count up to 1 to 32767.

Link relay(L) 2048 points

Memory area

Data register (DT)

32765 words (DT0 to DT32764)

Link register (LD)

256 words

Index register (I)

14 words (I0 to ID)


Item Descriptions

C32T C32TTM

C32T2 C32T2TM

C24R2 C24R2TM

C28P2 C28P2TM

Differential points Unlimited points Master control relay points (MCR) 256 points No. of labels (JP and LOOP) 256 points No. of step ladders 1000 stages No. of subroutines 500 subroutines Pulse catch input 8 points (X0, X1, X3, X4:5µs X2, X5 to X7: 100µs)

No. of interrupt programs 9 programs (external input 8 points X0, X1, X3, X4: 5µs X2, X5 to X7: 100µs), periodical interrupt 1 point (0.5ms to 30s)

Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog, program syntax check

Calendar timer Available (year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day of week) (However, this can only be used when a battery has been installed.) Note3)

Flash ROM backup Note4)

Backup by F12, P13 instructions

Data register (32765 words)

Automatic backup when power is cut off

Counter 16 points (1008 to 1023) Note6), internal relay 128 points (R2480 to R255F), data register 55 words (32710 to 32764)

Battery backup Memory that is set as hold area at system register (However, only when an optional battery has been installed.) Note5)

Battery life 220 days or more (Actual usage value: approx. 840 days (25°C)) (Periodic replacement interval: 1 year) (Value applies when no power is supplied at all) Note7)

Comment storage All kinds of comments, including I/O comments, remarks and block comments can be stored. (328kbyte)

Potentiometer (Volume) input 2 points, Resolution: 10 bits (K0 to K1000) (C32TH, C32T2H, C24R2H, C28P2H only)

Thermister input 2 points, Resolution: 10 bits (K0 to K1000) (C32THTM, C32T2HTM, C24R2HTM, C28P2HTM only)

PLC link function Max. 16 units, Link relay: 1024 points, Link register: 128 words (Link area allocation can be switched between the first half and the second half.)

Other functions Program edition during RUN, constant scan, forced on/off, password, floating-point operation, and PID processing

Note1)The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration. Note2)The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer. Note3)Precision of calendar timer: - At 0°C: less than 119 seconds per month - At 25°C: less than 51 seconds per month - At 55°C: less than 148 seconds per month Note4)Writing is available up to 10000 times. When the optional battery is used, all areas can be backed up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. Note5)If an area is held when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the hold area will be indefinite. Note6) The contact information and the elapsed value (EV) of the counter is backed up. The setting

value (SV) is not held. Note7) The value in the table indicates the life when using the backup battery for FPΣ (AFPG804). The

life is 6 years when using a commercial battery CR123A.


High-speed counter, pulse output and PWM output specifications Item Descriptions

High speed coun-ter

No. of input points

When using single-phase: Max. 4 channels

When using 2-phase: Max. 2 channels

Used ch. Note2) ch0 to ch4 ch0, ch2

Max. counting speed

When using single-phase: for 1 channel: Max. 50kHz (x1ch) for 2 channels: Max. 30kHz (x2ch) for 3 or 4 channels: Max. 20kHz (x3 to 4ch)

When using 2-phase: for 1 channel: Max. 20kHz (x1ch) for 2 channels: Max. 15kHz (x2ch)

Input mode When using single-phase: Addition input, Subtraction input

When using 2-phase: Two-phase input, One input, Direction distinction input

Input contact used Note1)

When using single-phase: X0: count input (ch0) X1: count input (ch1) X2: reset input (ch0, ch1) X3: count input (ch2) X4: count input (ch3) X5: reset input (ch2, ch3)

When using 2-phase: X0, X1: count input (ch0) X2: reset input (ch0) X3, X4: count input (ch2) X5: reset input (ch2)

Pulse output

No. of output points Max. 2 channels

Used ch Note2) ch0, ch2 Output mode CW and CCW mode, Pulse and Sign mode

Max. output frequency

When using 1 channel: Max. 100kHZ (x1ch) When using 2 channels: Max. 60kHz (x2ch)

When using linear interpolation function: Max. 100kHz When using circular interpolation function: Max. 20kHz

Input/output contact used Note1)

<ch0> X2: Home input Y0: CW output (Pulse output) Y1: CCW output (Sign output) Y2: Deviation counter reset output

<ch2> X5: Home input Y3: CW output (Pulse output) Y4: CCW output (Sign output) Y5: Deviation counter reset output

PWM output

No. of output points Max. 2 channels

Used ch Note2) ch0, ch2 Output frequency

1.5 to 12.5kHz (at resolution of 1000), 15.6 to 41.7kHZ (at resolution of 100)

Output duty 0.0 to 99.9% (at resolution of 1000), 1 to 99% (at resolution of 100) Output contact used Note1)

<ch0>Y0, <ch2>Y3

Note1)The contacts noted above cannot be allocated for more than one function. Also, contacts that are not assigned to the various functions can be used as general inputs/outputs. Inputs functions can be used as general inputs/outputs. Inputs X0 to X5 are pulse catch inputs, and can also be used for interrupt input. Note2)The pulse output, PWM output and high-speed counter of the same channel cannot be used at the same time.


Communication Specifications

Computer link Note1) 9) General-purpose serial communication Note1) 9) PC(PLC)

link

MODBUS RTU Note1)

1:1 communi-

cation

1:N communi-

cation

1:1 communi-

cation

1:N communi-

cation

1:1 communi-

cation

1:N communi-

cation

Interface RS232C RS485 RS232C RS485 RS232C RS485 RS232C RS485

Target items


AFPG-803 AFPG-806


AFPG-803 AFPG-806

AFPG-801 AFPG-802 AFPG-803 AFPG-806


AFPG-803 AFPG-806

Commu-nication method





Token bus (Floating master)



Note1) Although it has adequate tolerance to noise, it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission (in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily). Note2) The number of units of the PC(PLC) link with RS232C is two. Communication specifications

Item Specifications Interface RS232C (non-isolated) RS485 (isolated) Note1) 2) Communication mode 1:1 communication 1:N communication Communication method Half-duplex communication Two-wire half-duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Shielded twisted-pair cable or VCTF Transmission distance 15 m Max. 1200 m Note1) 2) Baud rate Note3) Note8) (to be set by system register) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

Trans-mission code

Computer link ASCII General-purpose serial communication ASCII, Binary

MODBUS RTU Binary Communication format (to be set by system register) Note4)

Data length 7 bits/8 bits Parity None/Even/Odd Stop bit 1 bit/2 bits Start code STX/No STX End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX

No. of connected units Note5) 6) 7) 2 units Max. 99 units (Max. 32 units when C-NET adapter is connected.)

Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance, and baud rate vary depending on the connected device.


Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below.

When using a baud rate of 2400 bps to 38400 bps, you can set up to a maximum of 99 units (stations) and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m.

Note3) Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface. Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication mode. Note5) The converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side. Adjust the response time for the FP-X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary. Note6)Regarding the setting of unit numbers: When the unit number setting switch is “0”, the system register is effective. When the unit number setting switch is other than “0”, the unit number setting switch is effective, and the unit number setting of the system register is ignored. (Max. 31 units can be specified with the unit number setting switch.) (When the setting is specified with the unit number setting switch, the COM port 1 and the COM port 2 has the same unit number. Note7)Connect the “−“ terminal and the “+” terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective. The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette. There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port. Note8) The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only. Also the baud rate must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette. The baud rate for the PC(PLC) link mode is fixed at 115200 bps. The baud rate for the RS232C port of the AFPG806 can be set by the system register only. Note9) The MEWTOCOL master function, MODBUS RTU master function and general-purpose serial communication function at the TOOL port is available only for the FPΣ 32k type.


12.2 I/O No. Allocation FPΣ control unit

Unit type Allocation points I/O No.

Control unit (NPN) FPG-C32 Input: 16 points X0 to XF Output: 16 points Y0 to YF

Control unit (PNP) FPG-C28 Input: 16 points X0 to XF Output: 12 points Y0 to YB

Control unit (Relay) FPG-C24 Input: 16 points X0 to XF Output: 8 points Y0 to Y7

I/O No. of FPΣ expansion unit (for left side expansion) • I/O Numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an

expansion I/O unit is added. • The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.

Unit type Alloca-

tion points





FPΣ expan-sion unit

FPG-XY64D2T FPG-XY64D2P

Input: 32 points − X100 to

X11F X180 to X19F

X260 to X27F

X340 to X35F

Output: 32 points − Y100 to

Y11F Y180 to Y19F

Y260 to Y27F

Y340 to Y35F

FPΣ positioning unit

1-axis type: FPG-PP11 FPG-PP12

Input: 16 points 1st axis

X100 to X10F

X180 to X18F

X260 to X26F

X340 to X34F

Output: 16 points

Y100 to Y10F

Y180 to Y18F

Y260 to Y26F

Y340 to Y34F

2-axis type: FPG-PP21 FPG-PP22

Input: 32 points

1st axis X100 to X10F

X180 to X18F

X260 to X26F

X340 to X34F

2nd axis X110 to X11F

X190 to X19F

X270 to X27F

X350 to X35F

Output: 32 points

1st axis Y100 to Y10F

Y180 to Y18F

Y260 to Y26F

Y340 to Y34F

2nd axis Y110 to Y11F

Y190 to Y19F

Y270 to Y27F

Y350 to Y35F

FPΣ expan-ded data memory unit

FPG-EM1 Input: 16 points

Battery error

X100 to X10F

X180 to X18F

X260 to X26F

X340 to X34F

FPΣ S-LINK unit FPG-SL

Input - X100 to X17F

X180 to X25F

X260 to X33F

X340 to X41F

Output - Y100 to Y17F

Y180 to Y25F

Y260 to Y33F

Y340 to Y41F

FPΣ Positioning unit RTEX Note)

FPG-PN2AN 2-axis type FPG-PN4AN 4-axis type FPG-PN8AN 8-axis type

Input 128 points - X100 to

X17F X180 to X25F

X260 to X33F

X340 to X41F

Output 128 points - Y100 to

Y17F Y180 to Y25F

Y260 to Y33F

Y340 to Y41F

Note) There is no restriction on installed positions, however, the number of installed units is up to 2 units. • Regarding FPΣ CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.


I/O No. of FP0 expansion unit (for right side expansion) • I/O numbers do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an

expansion I/O unit is added. • The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.

Unit type Allocation points Expansion unit 1

Expansion unit 2

Expansion unit 3

FP0 expansion unit

FP0-E8X Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67

FP0-E8R Input: 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output: 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63

FP0-E8YT/P FP0-E8YR

Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67

FP0-E16X Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F FP0-E16R FP0-E16T/P

Input: 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Output: 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67

FP0-E16YT/P Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F

FP0-E32T/P Input: 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output: 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F

FP0 analog I/O unit

FP0-A21

Input: 16 points (ch0)

WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)

Input: 16 points (ch1)

WX3 (X30 to X3F)

WX5 (X50 to X5F)

WX7 (X70 to X7F)

Output: 16 points WY2 (Y20 to Y2F)

WY4 (Y40 to Y4F)

WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)

FP0 A/D converter unit FP0 thermocouple unit

FP0-A80 FP0-TC4 FP0-TC8

Input: 16 points (ch0, 2, 4,6)

WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)

Input: 16 points (ch1, 3, 5, 7)

WX3 (X30 to X3F)

WX5 (X50 to X5F)

WX7 (X70 to X7F)

FP0 RTD unit FP0-RTD6


WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)


WX3 (X30 to X3F)

WX5 (X50 to X5F)

WX7 (X70 to X7F)


WY4 (Y40 to Y4F)

WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)

FP0 D/A converter unit

FP0-A04V FP0-A04I

Input: 16 points WX2 (X20 to X2F)

WX4 (X40 to X4F)

WX6 (X60 to X6F)

Input: 16 points (ch0, 2)

WY2 (Y20 to Y2F)

WY4 (Y40 to Y4F)

WY6 (Y60 to Y6F)

Input: 16 points (ch1, 3)

WY3 (Y30 to Y3F)

WY5 (Y50 to Y5F)

WY7 (Y70 to Y7F)

FP0 I/O link unit

FP0-IOL Input: 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output: 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F

• The data of each channel for FP0 A/D converter unit (FP0-A80), FP0 thermocouple unit (FP0-TC4/FP0-TC8), FP0 RTD unit (FP0-RTD6), FP0 D/A converter unit (FP0-A04V/P0-A04I) is switched and read/write using a program that includes the flag for switching converted data.

• Regarding FP0 CC-Link slave unit, please refer to the exclusive manual.


12.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants FPΣ 12k type

Item

Number of points and range of memory area

available for use

Function C32T

C32TTM

C32T2 C23T2TM

C24R2 C24R2TM

C28P2 C28P2TM

Rel

ay

External input Note1) (X) 512 points (X0 to X31F)

1184 points (X0 to X73F) Turns on or off based on external input.

External output Note1) (Y) 512 points (Y0 to Y31F)

1184 points (Y0 to Y73F) Externally outputs on or off state

Internal relay Note2) (R) 1568 points (R0 to R97F) Relay which turns on or off only within program.

Link relay Note2) (L) 1024 points (L0 to R97F) This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link.

Timer Note2) (T) 1024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008 to C1023) Note3)

This goes on when the timer reaches the specified time. It corresponds to the timer number.

Counter Note2) (C) This goes on when the timer increments. It corresponds to the timer number.

Special internal relay (R) 176 points (R9000 to R910F) Relay which turns on or off based on specific

conditions and is used as a flag.

Mem

ory

area

External input Note1) (WX) 32 words (WX0 to WX31)

74 words (WX0 to WX73)

Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word (16 bits) of data.

External output Note1) (WY)

32 words (WY0 to WY31)

74 words (WY0 to WY73)

Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word (16 bits) of data.

Internal relay Note2) (WR) 98 words (WR0 to WR97) Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word (16 bits) of data.

Link relay (WL) 64 words (WL0 to WL63) Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word (16 bits) of data.

Data register Note2) (DT) 32765 words (DT0 to DT32764)

Data memory used in program. Data is handled in 16-bit units (one word).

Link register Note2) (LD) 128 words (LD0 to LD127) This is a shared data memory which is used within the PLC link. Data is handled in 16-bit units (one word).

Timer/Counter set value area Note2) (SV) 1024 words (SV0 to SV1023)

Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and setting value of a counter. Stores by timer/counter number

Timer/Counter elapsed value area Note2) (EV) 1024 words (EV0 to EV1023)

Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer/counter. Stores by timer/counter number.

Special data register (DT)

260 words (DT90000 to DT90259)

Data memory for storing specific data. Various settings and error codes are stored.

Index register (I) 14 words (I0 to ID) Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier.

Con

trol

In

stru

ctio

n po

int Master control relay

points (MCR) 256

Number of labels (JP and LOOP) 256

Number of step ladders 1000 stages Number of subroutines 100 subroutines Number of interrupt programs

9 programs (8 external input points “X0 to X7”, 1 periodical interrupt point “0.5 ms to 30s”)


Item


available for use

Function C32T

C32TTM

C32T2 C23T2TM

C24R2 C24R2TM

C28P2 C28P2TM

Con

stan

t

Decimal constants (Integer type) (K)

K-32, 768 to K32, 767 (for 16-bit operation) K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K2, 147, 483, 647 (for 32-bit operation)

Hexadecimal constants (H)

H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation) H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)

Floating point type (F) F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038

F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038 Note1)The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration. Note2)If no battery is used, only the fixed area is backed up. (counters 16 points: C1008 to C1023, internal relays 128 points: R900 to R97F, data registers 55 words: DT32710 to DT32764). Writing is available up to 10000 times. Then the optional battery is used, all area can be backed up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. If an area is held when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the hold area will be indefinite. Note3)The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.


FPΣ 32k type

Item


available for use Function C32TH/C32THTM

C32T2H/C32T2HTM C24R2H/C24R2HTM C28P2H/C28P2HTM

Rel

ay

External input Note1) (X) 1184 points (X0 to X73F) Turns on or off based on external input. External output Note1) (Y) 1184 points (Y0 to Y73F) Externally outputs on or off state

Internal relay Note2) (R) 4096 points (R0 to R255F) Relay which turns on or off only within program.

Link relay Note2) (L) 2048 points (L0 to R127F) This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link.

Timer Note2) (T) 1024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008 to C1023) Note3)

This goes on when the timer reaches the specified time. It corresponds to the timer number.

Counter Note2) (C) This goes on when the counter increments. It corresponds to the counter number.

Special internal relay (R) 176 points (R9000 to R910F) Relay which turns on or off based on specific

conditions and is used as a flag.

Mem

ory

area

External input Note1) (WX) 74 words (WX0 to WX73) Code for specifying 16 external input points as

one word (16 bits) of data. External output Note1) (WY) 74 words (WY0 to WY73) Code for specifying 16 external output points

as one word (16 bits) of data. Internal relay Note2)

(WR) 256 words (WR0 to WR255) Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word (16 bits) of data.

Link relay (WL) 128 words (WL0 to WL127) Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one word (16 bits) of data.

Data register Note2) (DT) 32765 words (DT0 to DT32764)

Data memory used in program. Data is handled in 16-bit units (one word).

Link register Note2) (LD) 256 words (LD0 to LD255) This is a shared data memory which is used within the PLC link. Data is handled in 16-bit units (one word).

Timer/Counter set value area Note2) (SV) 1024 words (SV0 to SV1023)

Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and setting value of a counter. Stores by timer/counter number

Timer/Counter elapsed value area Note2) (EV) 1024 words (EV0 to EV1023)

Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer/counter. Stores by timer/counter number.

Special data register (DT)

260 words (DT90000 to DT90259)

Data memory for storing specific data. Various settings and error codes are stored.

Index register (I) 14 words (I0 to ID) Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier.

Con

trol

In

stru

ctio

n po

int

Master control relay points (MCR) 256

Number of labels (JP and LOOP) 256

Number of step ladders 1000 stages

Number of subroutines 500 subroutines

Number of interrupt programs

9 programs (8 external input points “X0 to X7”, 1 periodical interrupt point “0.5 ms to 30s”)

Con

stan

t

Decimal constants (Integer type) (K)

K-32, 768 to K32, 767 (for 16-bit operation) K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K2, 147, 483, 647 (for 32-bit operation)

Hexadecimal constants (H)

H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation) H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)

Floating point type (F) F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038 F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038

Note1)The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.


Note2)If no battery is used, only the fixed area is backed up. (counters 16 points: C1008 to C1023, internal relays 128 points: R2480 to R255F, data registers 55 words: DT32710 to DT32764). Writing is available up to 10000 times. Then the optional battery is used, all area can be backed up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. If an area is held when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the hold area will be indefinite. Note3)The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.



Chapter 13 Dimensions


13.1 Dimensions

13.1.1 Control Unit (Transistor Output Type)

FPG-C32T, FPG-C32T2, FPG-C28P2 FPG-C32TH, FPG-C32T2H, FPG-C28P2H

FPG-C32TTM, FPG-C32T2TM, FPG-C28P2TM FPG-C32THTM, FPG-C32T2HTM, FPG-C28P2HTM

When mounting Communication cassette

* The dimension with the communication cassette mounted is 105mm.


13.1.2 Control Unit (Relay Output Type)

FPG-C24R2, FPG-C24R2H

FPG-C24R2TM, FPG-C24R2HTM

* The dimension with the communication cassette mounted is the same as the transistor output type.


13.1.3 Expansion Unit

FPG-XY64D2T, FPG-XY64D2P

FPG-EM1


13.2 Connection Diagram with Motor Driver

13.2.1 Panasonic MINAS A-series, AIII-series

13.2.2 Panasonic MINAS Sseries, E-series


13.3 FP0 Power Supply Unit (AFP0634) Item Description Input Rated operating voltage 100-240 V AC

Operating voltage range 85-264 V AC Rated frequency 50/60 Hz Operating frequency 47-63 Hz The number of phase Single phase Inrush current 30 A(0-p) or less (Cold start) Leakage current 0.75 mA or less Holding time 10 ms or more

Output Rated output 24 V (±5 %) DC Rated current 0.7A Operating output current 0-0.7A Output ripple 500 mV

Protection feature

Over current regulation 0.735 A or more Over voltage regulation Possible

Life time 20000h ( at 55 °C)


13.4 Cable/Adapter Specifications

13.4.1 AFC8503/AFC8503S (PC)

(Unit: mm)

13.4.2 AFC85305/AFC8531/AFC8532 (For extending for the tool port)

(Unit: mm)



Chapter 14 Appendix


14.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area • System registers are used to set values (parameters) which determine operation ranges and functions

used. Set values based on the use and specifications of your program. • There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used. Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC. (1) Allocation of timers and counters (System register 5) The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number. (2) Hold/non-hold type setting (System registers 6 to 13) When these registers are set to “hold type”, the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG. mode or the power is turned off. If set to “non-hold type”, the values will be cleared to “0”. (3) Operation mode setting on error (System registers 4, 20 to 26) Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error, duplicated use of output, I/O verification error and operation error occur. (4) Time settings (System registers 31 to 34) Set time-out error detection time and the constant scan time. (5) MEWNET-W0 PLC link settings (System registers 40 to 47, 50 to 57) These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link communication. Note) The default value setting is “no PC(PLC) link communication”. (6) Input settings (System registers 400 to 403) When using the high-speed counter function, pulse catch function or interrupt function, set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function. (7) Tool and COM. ports communication settings (System registers 410 to 421) Set these registers when the Tool port, and COM1 and COM2 ports are to be used for computer link, general-purpose serial communication, PC(PLC) link, and modem communication. Note that the default setting is computer link mode.


Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read), there is no need write it again. Using programming tool software Produce: 1. Set the control unit in the PROG mode. 2.Option ->PLC Configuration 3.When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box, the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed. To change the value and setting status, write in the new value and /or select the setting status. 4.To register these settings, choose OK Precautions for system register setting -System register settings are effective from the time they are set.

However, input settings, tool port, COM port, and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN. With regard to the modem connection setting, when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG. to RUN, the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception.

-When the initialized operation is performed, all set system register values (parameters) will be initialized


14.1.1 Table of System Registers for FPΣ

No. Name Default value Descriptions

Hold/ Non-

hold 1

5 Starting number setting for counter 1008 0 to 1024 • These settings are

effective if the optional backup battery is installed.

• If no backup battery is used, do not change the default settings. Otherwise proper functioning of hold/non-hold values cannot be guaranteed.

6 Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter 1008 0 to 1024

7 Hold type area starting number setting for internal relays

12k: 90 32k: 0 to 256

12k: 0 to 98 32k: 0 to 256

8 Hold type area starting number setting for data registers 32710 0 to 32765

14 Hold or non-hold setting for step ladder process Non-hold Hold/Non-hold

4

Previous value is held for a leading edge detection instruction (DF instruction) with MC Note)

Hold Hold/ Non-hold

Hold/ Non-

hold 2

10 Hold type area starting word number for PC(PLC) link relays (for PC(PLC) link 0)

64 0 to 64

11 Hold type area starting word number for PC(PLC) link relays (for PC(PLC) link 1)

128 (32k only) 64 to 128

12 Hold type area starting number for PC(PLC) link registers (for PC(PLC) link 0)

128 0 to 128

13 Hold type area starting number for PC(PLC) link registers (for PC(PLC) link 1)

256 (32k only) 128 to 256

Action on

error

20 Disable or enable setting for duplicated output Disabled Disabled/Enabled

23 Operation setting when an I/O verification error occurs Stop Stop/Continuation of operation

26 Operation setting when an operation error occurs Stop Stop/Continuation of operation

4 Alarm battery error (Operating setting when battery error occurs)

Disabled

Dis- abled:

When a battery error occurs, a self-diagnostic error is not issued and the ERROR/ ALARM LED does not flash.

Ena- bled:

When a battery error occurs, a self-diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR/ ALARM LED flashes.

Note) The 12k type is available with Ver. 1.4 to 1.9, 2.4 or later.



Time set-ting

31 Wait time setting for multi-frame communication

6500.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms

32 Communication timeout setting for SEND/RECV, RMRD/RMWT commands

10000.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms

34 Constant value settings for scan time

Normal scan

0: Normal scan 0 to 350 ms: Scans once each specified time interval

PC (PLC) link 0 set-ting

40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words

41 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words

42 Starting word number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63

43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words

44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 0 to 127

45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words

46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal (32k only)

Normal/reverse

47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 16 1 to 16

PC (PLC) link 1 set-ting (32k only)

50 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words

51 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words

52 Starting word number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127

53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words

54 Starting number for link data register transmission 128 128 to 255

55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words

57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 16 1 to 16



High-speed coun-

ter

400 High-speed counter operation mode settings (X0 to X2)

CH0: Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter

CH0

Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter. Two-phase input (X0, X1) Two-phase input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2) Incremental input (X0) Incremental input (X0), Reset input (X2) Decremental input (X0) Decremental input (X0), Reset input (X2) incremental/decremental input (X0, X1) incremental/decremental input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2) Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1) Incremental/decremental control input (X0, X1), Reset input (X2)


CH1

Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter. Incremental input (X1) Incremental input (X1), Reset input (X2) Decremental input (X1) Decremental input (X1), Reset input (X2)

401 High-speed counter operation mode settings (X3 to X5)


CH2

Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter. Two-phase input (X3, X4) Two-phase input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5) Incremental input (X3) Incremental input (X3), Reset input (X5) Decremental input (X5) Decremental input (X5), Reset input (X5) Incremental/decremental input (X3, X4) Incremental/decremental input (X3, X4), Reset input (X5) Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4) Incremental/decremental control (X3, X4), Reset input (X5)

HC3: Does not set input X4 as high-speed counter

CH3

Does not set input X4 as high-speed counter. Incremental input (X4) Incremental input (X4), Reset input (X5) Decremental input (X4) Decremental input (X4), Reset input (X5)



Inter-rupt- input

402 Pulse catch input settings Not set

Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch input.

403 Interrupt input settings Not set

Specify the input contacts used as interrupt input.

Specify the effective interrupt edge. (When set: ON→OFF is valid)

Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental control, the setting for CH1 is invalid in part 2 of system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is invalid in part2 of system register 401. Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401. Note3) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and 403. Note4) If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter]→[Pulse catch]→[Interrupt input]. <Example> When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0 functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.



Tool port set-ting

410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99

412 Communication mode setting Computer link Computer link

General-purpose communications Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled

413 Communication format setting

Data length bit: 8 bits Parity check: “with odd” Stop bit: 1 bit

Enter the settings for the various items. - Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits - Parity check: none/with odd/with even - Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits - The following setting is valid only when

the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to “General-purpose serial communication”.

- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None - Header: STX not exist/STX exist

415 Communication speed (Baud rate) setting

9600 bps 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps / 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps / 115200 bps

420 Starting address for received buffer of general (serial data) communication mode

0 0 to 32764

421

Buffer capacity setting for data received of general (serial data) communication mode

0 0 to 2048

COM1 port set-ting


412 Communication mode setting Computer link

Computer link General-purpose serial communication PC(PLC) link MODBUS RTU

Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled


Data length bit: 8 bits Parity check: Odd Stop bit: 1 bit

Enter the settings for the various items. - Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits - Parity check: none/with odd/with even - Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits - The following setting is valid only when


- Terminator CR/CR+LF/None - Header: STX not exist/STX exist


9600 bps 2400 bps / 4800 bps / 9600 bps / 19200 bps / 38400 bps / 57600 bps / 115200 bps

416 Starting address for received buffer of general (serial data) communication mode

0 0 to 32764

417


2048 0 to 2048

Note) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings: Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1. The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps. The transmission speed of the RS485 port (COM1) of AFPG806 must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette.



COM2

port set-ting


412

Communication mode setting Computer link

Computer link General-purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU

Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled/Disabled


Data length bit: 8 bits Parity check: “with odd” Stop bit: 1 bit

Enter the settings for the various items. - Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits - Parity check: none/odd/even - Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits - The following setting is valid only when


- Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None - Header: STX not exist/STX exist


9600 bps

2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps

416

Starting address for received buffer of general (serial data) communication mode

2048 0 to 32764

417


2048 0 to 2048

Note) The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings: the data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1. The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps. The transmission speed of the RS485 port (COM1) of AFPG806 must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette.


14.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPΣ

The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction. WR900

Relay No. Name Description

R9000 Self-diagnostic error flag Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs. ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.

R9001 Not used R9002 Not used R9003 Not used R9004 I/O verification error flag Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.

R9005 Backup battery error flag (non-hold) Turns on when an backup battery error occurs.

R9006 Backup battery error flag (hold)

Turns on when a backup battery error occurs. Once a battery error has been detected, this is held even after recovery has been made. It goes off if the power supply is turned off, or if the system is initialized.

R9007 Operation error flag (hold)

Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs. ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017. (indicates the first operation error which occurred).

R9008 Operation error flag (non-hold)

Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs. ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.

R9009 Carry flag This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed.

R900A > Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger in the comparison instructions.

R900B = Flag

Turns on for an instant, - when the compared results are equal in the comparison

instructions. - when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic

instructions.

R900C < Flag Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the comparison instructions.

R900D Auxiliary timer instruction flag

Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM) auxiliary timer instruction. The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off.

R900E Tool port communication error Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.

R900F Constant scan error flag Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution. This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.


WR901 Relay No. Name Description R9010 Always on relay Always on. R9011 Always off relay Always off. R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.

R9013 Initial (on type) pulse relay

Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been started, and goes off for the second and subsequent scans.

R9014 Initial (off type) pulse relay

Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has been started, and goes on for the second and subsequent scans.

R9015 Step ladder initial pulse relay (on type)

Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the step ladder control.

R9016 Not used - R9017 Not used -

R9018 0.01 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.01 sec. cycles.

R9019 0.02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.02 s. cycles.

R901A 0.1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.1 s. cycles.

R901B 0.2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 0.2 s. cycles.

R901C 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 1 s. cycles.

R901D 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 2 s. cycles.

R901E 1 min clock pulse relay Repeats on/off operations in 1 min. cycles.

R901F Not used -


WR902 Relay No. Name Description

R9020 RUN mode flag Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG. Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.

R9021 Not used R9022 Not used R9023 Not used R9024 Not used R9025 Not used R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed. R9027 Not used R9028 Not used

R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output relay timer/counter contacts.

R902A Interrupt enable flag Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the ICTL instruction.

R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.

R902C Sample point flag Note) Sampling by the instruction=0 Sampling at constant time intervals=1

R902D Sample trace end flag Note)

When the sampling operation stops=1, When the sampling operation starts=0

R902E Sampling stop trigger flag Note)

When the sampling stop trigger activates=1 When the sampling stop trigger stops=0

R902F Sampling enable flag Note)

When sampling starts=1 When sampling stops=0

Note) Available for the 32k type only.


WR903 Relay No. Name Description R9030 Not used - R9031 Not used -

R9032 COM1 port communication mode flag

- Turns on when the general-purpose communication function is being used

- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL-COM or the PLC link function is being used.

R9033 Print instruction execution flag

Off: Printing is not executed. On: Execution is in progress.

R9034 RUN overwrite complete flag

Goes on for only the first scan following completion of a rewrite during the RUN operation.

R9035 Not used - R9036 Not used -

R9037 COM1 port communication error flag

- Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data communication.

- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.

R9038 COM1 port reception done flag during general purpose communication

- Turns on when the terminator is received during general -purpose serial communication.

R9039

COM1 port transmission done flag during general-purpose serial communication

- Goes on when transmission has been completed in general-purpose serial communication.

- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose serial communication.

R903A High-speed counter control flag

ch0 Turn on while the high-speed counter instructions F166(HC15), F167(HC1R) and the pulse output instructions F171(SPDH) to F176(PWMH) are executed.

R903B High-speed counter control flag


R903C High-speed counter control flag


R903D High-speed counter control flag


R903E TOOL port reception done flag during general purpose communication

- Turns on when the terminator is received during general -purpose serial communication.

R903F

TOOL port transmission done flag during general-purpose serial communication


- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose serial communication.

Note) R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan.



R9040 TOOL port operation mode flag

- Turns on when the general-purpose communication function is being used

- Goes off when the computer link function is being used. R9041 COM1 port PLC link flag Turn on while the PLC link function is used.

R9042 COM2 port communication mode flag

- Goes on when the general-purpose serial communication is used.

- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used. R9043 Not used -

R9044 COM1 port SEND/RECV instruction execution flag

Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions can be executed or not. Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed. (During executing the instruction) On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.

R9045 COM1 port SEND/RECV instruction execution end flag

Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions as follows: Off: No abnormality detected. On: An abnormality detected. (communication error) The error code is stored in DT90039. End code: DT90124

R9046 Not used -

R9047 COM2 port communication error flag

- Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication.

- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.

R9048 COM2 port reception done flag during general-purpose communicating

- Turn on when the terminator is received during general-purpose serial communication.

R9049 COM2 port transmission done flag during general-purpose communication


- Goes off when transmission is requested in general-purpose communication.

R904A COM2 port SEND/RECV instruction execution flag

Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions can be executed or not. Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed. (During executing the instruction) On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed.

R904B COM2 port SEND/RECV instruction execution end flag

Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions as follows: Off: No abnormality detected. On: An abnormality detected. (communication error) The error code is stored in DT90039. End code: DT90125

R904C to R904D Not used -

R904E Circular interpolation control flag

Goes on when the F176 (SPCH) circular interpolation instruction is executed.

R904F Circular interpolation data overwrite confirmation flag

It is used to overwrite next data when the circular interpolation instruction is used in the continuation mode.

Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan. WR905

Relay No. Name Description

R9050 MEWNET-W0 PLC link transmission error flag

When using MEWNET-W0 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link. - Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area

settings. R9051 to R905F Not used



R9060

MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 0 transmission assurance relay

Unit No.1

Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in PC(PLC) link 0 mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link 0 mode.

R9061 Unit No.2


R9062 Unit No.3


R9063 Unit No.4


R9064 Unit No.5


R9065 Unit No.6


R9066 Unit No.7


R9067 Unit No.8


R9068 Unit No.9


R9069 Unit No.10


R906A Unit No.11


R906B Unit No.12


R906C Unit No.13


R906D Unit No.14


R906E Unit No.15


R906F Unit No.16




R9070

MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 0 operation mode relay

Unit No.1

Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode. Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.

R9071 Unit No.2


R9072 Unit No.3


R9073 Unit No.4


R9074 Unit No.5


R9075 Unit No.6


R9076 Unit No.7


R9077 Unit No.8


R9078 Unit No.9


R9079 Unit No.10


R907A Unit No.11


R907B Unit No.12


R907C Unit No.13


R907D Unit No.14


R907E Unit No.15


R907F Unit No.16




R9080

MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 1 transmission assurance relay (32k only)

Unit No.1


R9081 Unit No.2


R9082 Unit No.3


R9083 Unit No.4


R9084 Unit No.5


R9085 Unit No.6


R9086 Unit No.7


R9087 Unit No.8


R9088 Unit No.9

Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.

R9089 Unit No.10


R908A Unit No.11


R908B Unit No.12


R908C Unit No.13


R908D Unit No.14


R908E Unit No.15


R908F Unit No.16




R9090

MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 1 operation mode relay (32k only)

Unit No.1


R9091 Unit No.2


R9092 Unit No.3


R9093 Unit No.4


R9094 Unit No.5


R9095 Unit No.6


R9096 Unit No.7


R9097 Unit No.8


R9098 Unit No.9


R9099 Unit No.10


R909A Unit No.11


R909B Unit No.12


R909C Unit No.13


R909D Unit No.14


R909E Unit No.15


R909F Unit No.16



14.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FPΣ

The special data registers are one word (16-bit) memory areas which store specific information. (A: Available, N/A: Not available)

Register No. Name Descriptions Read

-ing Writ-ing

DT90000 Self-diagnostic error code

The self-diagnostic error code is stored here when a self-diagnostic error occurs.

A N/A

DT90001 Not used N/A N/A

DT90002 Position of abnormal I/O unit for FPΣ left side expansion

When an error occurs at FPΣ expansion I/O unit, the bit corresponding to the unit No. will be set on “1”. Monitor using binary display.

A N/A

DT90003 Not used N/A N/A DT90004 Not used N/A N/A DT90005 Not used N/A N/A

DT90006 Position of abnormal intelligent unit for FPΣ left side expansion

When an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit, the bit corresponding to the unit No. will turn on . Monitor using binary display.

A N/A

DT90007 Not used N/A N/A DT90008 Not used N/A N/A

DT90009 Communication error flag for COM2

Stores the error contents when using COM2 port.

A N/A

DT90010 Position of I/O verify error unit for FP0 right side expansion

When the state of installation of FP0 expansion I/O unit has changed since the power was turned on, the bit corresponding to the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary display.

A N/A


(A: Available, N/A: Not available) Register

No. Name Descriptions Read-ing

Writ-ing

DT90011 Position of I/O verify error unit for FPΣ left side expansion

When the state of installation of an FPΣ expansion I/O unit has changed since the power was turned on, the bit corresponding to the unit No. will turn on. Monitor using binary display. A N/A

DT90012 Not used N/A N/A DT90013 Not used N/A N/A

DT90014 Operation auxiliary register for data shift instruction

One shift-out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction, F105 (BSR) or F106 (BSL) is executed. The value can be read and written by executing F0 (MV) instruction.

A A

DT90015 Operation auxiliary register for division instruction

The divided remainder (16-bit) is stored in DT90015 when the division instruction F32(%) or F52(B%) instruction is executed. The divided remainder (32-bit) is stored in DT90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33(D%) or F53(DB%) is executed. The value can be read and written by executing F0(MV) instruction.

A A

DT90016 A A

DT90017 Operation error address (hold type)

After commencing operation, the address where the first operation error occurred is stored. Monitor the address using decimal display.

A N/A

DT90018 Operation error address (non-hold type)

The address where an operation error occurred is stored. Each time an error occurs, the new address overwrites the previous address. At the beginning of a scan, the address is 0. Monitor the address using decimal display.

A N/A

DT90019 2.5 ms ring counter Note1)

The data stored here is increased by one every 2.5 ms. (H0 to HFFFF) Difference between the values of the two points (absolute value) x 2.5 ms = Elapsed time between the two points.

A N/A

DT90020 10 µs ring counter Note1) Note2)

The data stored here is increased by one every 10.24 µs. (H0 to HFFFF) Difference between the values of the two points (absolute value) x 10.24 µs = Elapsed time between the two points. Note) The exact value is 10.24 µs.

A N/A

DT90021 Not used N/A N/A Note1) It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan. Note2) As DT90020 is renewed even if F0(MV), DT90020 and D instruction is being executed, it can be

used to measure the block time.




Writ-ing

DT90022 Scan time (current value) Note)

The current scan time is stored here. Scan time is calculated using the formula: Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.

A N/A

DT90023 Scan time (minimum value) Note)

The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan time is calculated using the formula: Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.

A N/A

DT90024 Scan time (maximum value) Note)

The maximum scan time is stored here. The scan time is calculated using the formula: Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 ms Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.

A N/A

DT90025

Mask condition monitoring register for interrupts (INT0 to 7)

The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here. Monitor using binary display.

A N/A


DT90027 Periodical interrupt interval (INT24)

The value set by ICTL instruction is stored. K0: periodical interrupt is not used. K1 to K3000: 0.5ms to 1.5s or 10ms to 30s

A N/A

DT90028 Not used N/A N/A DT90029 Not used N/A N/A DT90030 Message 0

The contents of the specified message (Data length) are stored in these special data registers when F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.

A N/A

DT90031 Message 1 DT90032 Message 2 DT90033 Message 3 DT90034 Message 4 DT90035 Message 5 DT90036 Not used N/A N/A

Note) Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode, and shows the operation cycle time. (In PROG. mode, the scan time for the operation is not displayed.) The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG.




Writ-ing

DT90037 Operation auxiliary register for search instruction F96(SRC)

The number of data that match the searched data is stored here when F96 (SRC) instruction is executed.

A N/A

DT90038 Operation auxiliary register for search instruction F96(SRC)

The position of the first matching data is stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is executed.

A N/A


DT90040 Potentiometer (volume) input V0

The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is stored here. This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the program to read this value to a data register. V0→DT90040 V1→DT90041

A N/A DT90041 Potentiometer

(volume) input V1

DT90042 Used by the system. N/A N/A DT90043 Used by the system. N/A N/A

DT90044 High-speed counter elapsed value

For CH0

The elapsed value (32-bit data) of the high-speed counter is stored here. The value can be read or written by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

A A DT90045

DT90046 High-speed counter target value

For CH0

The target value (32-bit data) of the high-speed counter specified by the high-speed counter instruction is stored here. Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high-speed counter related instruction F166, F167, F171, F175 or F176 is executed. The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

A N/A

DT90047

DT90048 High-speed counter elapsed value area

For CH1

The elapsed value (32-bit data) of the high-speed counter is stored here. The value can be read and written by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

A A DT90049

DT90050 High-speed counter target value area

For CH1

The target value (32-bit data) of the high-speed counter specified by the high-speed counter instruction is stored here. Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high-speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is executed. The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

A N/A

DT90051




Writ-ing

DT90052 High-speed counter and pulse output control flag

A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction to reset the high-speed counter, disable counting, continue or clear high-speed counter instruction. Control code setting

Note) Refer to the “Count for reset input” in “Count 6.3.2 “Input Mode and Count”

N/A A

DT90053 Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) monitor (hour/minute)

Hour and minute data of the Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) are stored here. This data is read-only data. It cannot be overwritten.

A N/A

DT90054

Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) setting (minute/second)

The year, month, day, hour, minute, second and day-of-the-week data for the Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) is stored. The built-in Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years. The Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) can be set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the F0 (MV) instruction.(see example for DT90058)

As a day of the week is not automatically set on FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set each value for 00 to 06.

A A

DT90055 Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) setting (day/hour)

DT90056 Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) setting (year/month)

DT90057

Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) setting (day-of-the-week)




Writ-ing

DT90058 Real-Time Clock (Clock/Calendar) time setting

The Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) is adjusted as follows. When setting the Real-Time Clock(Clock/Calendar) by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot be performed with any instruction other than F0 (MV) instruction.) <Example> Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when the X0 turns on.

Note) If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 are changed with the programming tool software, the time will be set when the new values are written. Therefore, it is unnecessary to write to DT90058.

A A

DT90059 Serial communication error code

Error code is stored here when a communication error occurs. N/A N/A




Writ-ing

DT90060 Step ladder process (0 to 15)

Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. When the process starts up, the bit corresponding to the process number turns on. Monitor using binary display.

A programming tool software can be used to write data.

A A

























Writ-ing


Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. When the process starts up, the bit corresponding to the process number turns on . Monitor using binary display.


A A



















Writ-ing


Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process. When the process starts up, the bit corresponding to the process number turns on “1”. Monitor using binary display


A A
























DT90122 Step ladder process (992 to 999) (higher byte is not used.)




Writ-ing

DT90123 Not used - N/A N/A

DT90124 COM1 SEND/RECV instruction end code

For details, refer to Programming Manual (F145 and F146).

N/A N/A

DT90125 COM2 SEND/RECV instruction end code

For details, refer to Programming Manual (F145 and F146).

N/A N/A

DT90126 Forced Input/Output unit No. Used by the system N/A N/A

DT90127 to DT90139

Not used - N/A N/A

DT90140

MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 0 status

The number of times the receiving operation is performed.

A N/A

DT90141 The current interval between two receiving operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90142 The minimum interval between two receiving operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90143 The maximum interval between two receiving operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90144 The number of times the sending operation is performed.

DT90145 The current interval between two sending operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90146 The minimum interval between two sending operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90147 The maximum interval between two sending operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90148

MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 1 status (32k type only)

The number of times the receiving operation is performed.

A N/A

DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90150 The minimum interval between two receiving operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90151 The maximum interval between two receiving operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90152 The number of times the sending operation is performed.

DT90153 The current interval between two sending operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90154 The minimum interval between two sending operations: value in the register x 2.5ms

DT90155 The maximum interval between two sending operations: value in the register x 2.5ms




Writ-ing

DT90156 MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 0 status

Area used for measurement of receiving interval.

A N/A DT90157 Area used for measurement of sending

interval.

DT90158 MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link 1 Status (32k type only)

Area used for measurement of receiving interval.

A N/A DT90159 Area used for measurement of sending

interval.

DT90160 MEWNET-W0 PLC link unit No. Stores the unit No. of PLC link A N/A

DT90161 MEWNET-W0 PLC link error flag Stores the error contents of PLC link A N/A

DT90162 to DT90169 Not used - N/A N/A

DT90170

MEWNET-W0 PLC link status

Duplicated destination for PLC inter-link address

A N/A

DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.

DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected.

DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.

DT90174 No. of times undefined commands have been received.

DT90175 No. of times sum check errors have occurred during reception.

DT90176 No. of times format errors have occurred in received data.

DT90177 No. of times transmission errors have occurred.

DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.

DT90179 No. of times overlapping parent units have occurred.

DT90180 to DT90189 Not used - N/A N/A

DT90190 High-speed counter control flag monitor for CH0

This monitors the data specified in DT90052.

A N/A







Writ-ing

DT90194 to DT90199

Not used - N/A N/A


For CH2

The elapsed value (32-bit data) for the high-speed counter is stored here. The value can be read and written by executing the F1 (DMV) instruction.

A A DT90201


For CH2

The target value (32-bit data) of the high-speed counter specified by the high-speed counter instruction is stored here. Target values have been preset for the various instructions, to be used when the high-speed counter related instruction F166, F167, F171, F175 or F176 is executed. The value can be read by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

A N/A

DT90203


For CH3

The elapsed value (32-bit data) for the high-speed counter is stored here. The value can be read and written by executing F1 (DMV) instruction.

A A DT90205


For CH3

The target value (32-bit data) of the high-speed counter specified by the high-speed counter instruction is stored here. Target values have been preset for the various instructions, to be used when the high-speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is executed. The value can be read by executing the F1 (DMV) instruction.

A N/A

DT90207

DT90208 to DT90218

Not used N/A N/A




Writ-ing

DT90219 Unit No. (Station No.) selection for DT90220 to DT90251

0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8, 1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16

A N/A

DT90220

PLC link Unit (station) No. 1 or 9

System register 40 and 41

The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter-link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below. <Example> When DT90219 is 0

A N/A

DT90221 System regis-ter 42 and 43



DT90224






DT90228






DT90232






DT90236









Writ-ing

DT90240



The contents of the system register settings pertaining to the PLC inter-link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below. <Example> when DT90219 is 0.

A N/A




DT90244

PLC link Unit (sta-tion) No. 7 or 15





DT90248

PLC link Unit (sta-tion) No. 8 or 16





DT90252 Not used

N/A N/A DT90253 Not used DT90254 Not used D590255 Not used

DT90256 Unit No. (Station No.) switch monitor for COM port

Used by the system N/A N/A


14.2 Table of Basic Instructions

Name Boolean Symbol Description

Step

s *3

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Sequence basic instructions

Start ST Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) contact.

1 (2)

Start Not ST/ Begins a logic operation with a Form B (normally closed) contact.

1 (2)

Out OT Outputs the operated result to the specified output.

1 (2)

Not / Inverts the operated result up to this instruction. 1

AND AN Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially.

1 (2)

AND Not AN/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact serially.

1 (2)

OR OR Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel.

1 (2)

OR Not OR/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact in parallel.

1 (2)

Leading edge start ST↑

Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected.

2 *2

*2

Trailing edge start ST↓

Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected.

2 *2

*2

Leading edge AND AN↑

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected.

2 *2

*2

Trailing edge AND AN↓

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected.

2 *2

*2

Leading edge OR OR↑

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected.

2 *2

*2

Trailing edge OR OR↓

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected.

2 *2

*2

Leading edge out OT↑

Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)

2

Trailing edge out OT↓

Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected. (for pulse relay)

2

Alterna-tive out

ALT

Inverts the output condition (on/off) each time the leading edge of the trigger is detected.

3

AND stack ANS

Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially. 1

OR stack ORS

Connects the multiple instruction blocks in parallel. 1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models. *2) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later. *3) In the FP2/FP2SH/10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280, T256, C256 or

anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. For the FPΣ and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used.



Step

s *5

*6

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Push stack PSHS

Stores the operated result up to this instruction. *2 1

Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction. *2 1

Pop stack

POPS

Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 1

Leading edge differential

DF

Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected.

1

Trailing edge differential

DF/

Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected.

1

Leading edge differential (initial execution type)

DFI

Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected. The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan.

1

Set

SET

Output is set to and held at on. 3

Reset

RST

Output is set to and held at off. 3

Keep KP

Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on.

1 (2)

No operation NOP No operation. 1 Basic function instructions On-delay timer

TML

After set value “n” x 0.001 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to on.

3 (4)

*3

TMR After set value “n” x 0.01 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to on.

3 (4)

*3

TMX After set value “n” x 0.1 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to on.

3 (4)

*3

TMY After set value “n” x 1 second, timer contact “a” is set to on.

4 (5)

*3

Auxiliary timer (16-bit)

F137 (STMR)

After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the specified output and R900D are set to on.

5


F183 (DSTM)

After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the specified output and R900D are set to on.

7

Time constant processing

F182

Executes the filter processing for the specified input. 9 *4

*4

Counter

CT

Decrements from the preset value “n” 3

(4) *3 *3 *3

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models. *2) The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models. *3) For FP2SH, FP10SH and FP-X Ver2.0 or later, any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction. *4) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 2.0 or later. *5) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280 or anything beyond for the

KP instruction, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.

*6) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the number of steps is the number in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses. For the FPΣ and FP-X, the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number.



Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

UP/DOWN counter

F118 (UDC)

Increments or decrements from the preset value “S” based on up/down input. 5

Shift register

SR

Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal relay (WR)] data to the left. 1

(2) *1

Left/right shift register

F119 (LRSR)

Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range specified by “D1” and “D2” to the left or to the right. 5

Control instructions Master control relay

MC

Starts the master control program. 2

Master control relay end

MCE

Ends the master control program. 2

Jump Label

JP LBL

The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there.

2 (3) *2

1

Auxiliary jump Label

F19 (SJP) LBL

The program jumps to the label instruction specified by “S” and continues from there.

3 1

Loop Label

LOOP LBL

The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there (the number of jumps is set in “S”).

4 (5) *3

1

Break

BRK

Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST/RUN mode only.

1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used, the number of steps is the number in

parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number (word address) has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.

*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses.

*3) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a loop instruction has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.



Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

End

ED

The operation of program is ended. Indicates the end of a main program. 1

Conditional end

CNDE

The operation of program is ended when the trigger turns on. 1

Eject

EJECT

Adds page break for use when printing. 1

Step ladder instructions Start step SSTP

The start of program “n” for process control 3

Next step NSTL

Starts the specified process “n” and clears the process currently started. (Scan execution type)

3

NSTP

Starts the specified process “n” and clears the process currently started. (Pulse execution type)

3

Clear step CSTP

Resets the specified process “n”. 3

Clear multi-ple steps

SCLR

Resets multiple processes specified by “n1” and “n2”. 5

Step end STPE

End of step ladder area 1

Subroutine instructions Subroutine call

CALL

When the trigger is on: Executes the subroutine.

When the trigger is off: Not execute the subroutine. The output in the subroutine is maintained.

2 (3) *1

Output off type subroutine call

FCAL

When the trigger is on: Executes the subroutine.

When the trigger is off: Not execute the subroutine. But, the output in the subroutine is cleared.

4 (5) *1

Subroutine entry

SUB

Indicates the start of the subroutine program “n”. 1

Subroutine return

RET Ends the subroutine program. 1

Interrupt instructions Interrupt INT

Indicates the start of the interrupt program “n”. 1

Interrupt return

IRET Ends the interrupt program. 1

Interrupt control

ICTL

Select interrupt enable/disable or clear in “S1” and “S2” and execute. 5

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.



Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0

(FP0

R m

ode)

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Special setting instructions Communica-tion condi-tions setting

SYS1

Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant.

13

*1 *1

Password setting

Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant.

*2

*2

Interrupt setting

Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant.

PLC link time setting

Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used, based on the contents specified by the character constant.

MEWTOCOL-COM response control

Change the communication conditions of the COM. port or tool port for MEWTOCOL-COM based on the contents specified by the character constant.

High-speed counter operation mode changing

Change the operation mode of the high-speed counter, based on the contents specified by the character constant.

*3

*3

System registers “No. 40 to No. 47” changing

SYS2

Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function.

7

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) With FP-X Ver2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver 3.10 or later, the baud rate can be selected from 300, 600 or 1200 bps. *2) With FPΣ 32k type, the 8-digit password can be selected. *3) With FPΣ 32k type and FP-X Ver1.10 or later, it can be used.



Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Data compare instructions 16-bit data compare (Start)

ST=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”. 5

ST<>

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.

5

ST>

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”. 5

ST>=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.

5

ST<

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”. 5

ST<=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.

5

16-bit data compare (AND)

AN=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”.

5

AN<>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.

5

AN>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”.

5

AN>=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.

5

AN<

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”.

5

AN<=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.

5

16-bit data compare (OR)

OR=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1=S2”.

5

OR<>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1>S2”.

5

OR>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2”.

5

OR>=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1>S2” or “S1=S2”.

5

OR<

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2”.

5

OR<=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 16-bit data in the comparative condition “S1<S2” or “S1=S2”.

5

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially



Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

32-bit data compare (Start)

STD=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

STD<>

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9

STD>

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9

STD>=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

STD<

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

9

STD<=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

32-bit data compare (AND)

AND=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

AND<>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9

AND>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9

AND>=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

AND<

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

9

AND<=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

32-bit data compare (OR)

ORD=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

ORD<>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9

ORD>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9

ORD>=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9

ORD<

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

9

ORD<=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9




Step

s

FP-e

FP

0 FP

0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Floating point type real number data compare (Start)

STF=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

STF<>

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

STF>

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

STF>=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

STF<

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

STF<=

Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

Floating point type real number data compare (AND)

ANF=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ANF<>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ANF>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ANF>=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ANF<

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ANF<=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact serially by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

Floating point type real number data compare (OR)

ORF=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ORF<>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ORF>

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ORF>=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ORF<

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

ORF<=

Connects a Form A (normally open) contact in parallel by comparing two 32-bit data in the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)” or “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.

9 *1 *1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.10 or later and FPΣ 32k type


14.3 Table of High-level Instructions The high-level instructions are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with numbers. For most of the high-level instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The differences between the two types are explained as follows: - Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on. - Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected. For the FP0/FP0R/FPΣ/FP-X, the P type high-level instructions are not available.

Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Data transfer instructions F0 P0

16-bit data move

MV PMV

S, D (S)→(D) 5

F1 P1

32-bit data move

DMV PDMV

S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7

F2 P2

16-bit data invert and move

MV PMV/

S, D (S)→(D) 5

F3 P3

32-bit data invert and move

DMV/ PDMV/

S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7

F4 P4

Reading of head word No. of the specified slot

GETS PGETS

S, D The head word No. of the specified slot is read. 5

*1 *1

F5 P5

Bit data move

BTM PBTM

S, n, D

The specified one bit in “S” is transferred to the specified one bit in “D”. The bit is specified by “n”.

7

F6 P6

Hexadecimal digit (4-bit) data move

DGT PDGT

S, n, d The specified one digit in “S” is transferred to the specified one digit in “D”. The digit is specified by “n”.

7

F7 P7

Two 16-bit data move

MV2 PMV2

S1, S2, D

(S1)→(D), (S2)→(D+1) 7

F8 P8

Two 32-bit data move

DMV2 PDMV2

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D), (S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2) 11

F10 P10

Block move BKMV PBKMV

S1, S2, D

The data between “S1” and “S2” is transferred to the area starting at “D”. 7

F11 P11

Block copy COPY PCOPY

S, D1, D2

The data of “S” is transferred to the all area between “D1” and “D2”. 7

F12 Data read from EEP-ROM

ICRD S1, S2, D

The data stored in the expansion memory of the EEP-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the area starting at “D”.

11 *2

P13 Data write to EEP-ROM

PICWT S1, S2, D

The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the EEP-ROM starting at “D”. 11

*2

F12 Data read from F-ROM

ICRD S1, S2, D

The data stored in the expansion memory of the F-ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the area starting at “D”.

11

P13 Data write to F-ROM

PICWT S1, S2, D

The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the F-ROM starting at “D”. 11

F12 P12

Data read from IC card

ICRD PICRD

S1, S2, D

The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC card specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the area starting at “D”.

11

F13 P13

Data write to IC card

ICWT PICWT

S1, S2, D

The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred to the IC card expansion memory area starting at “D”.

11

F14 P14

Program read from IC memory card

PGRD PPGRD

S The program specified using “S” is transferred into the CPU from IC memory card and executes it.

3

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used *2) This instruction is available for FP0 Ver. 2.0 or later.


Num-ber Name Boo-lean

Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FP

Σ FP

-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F15 P15

16-bit data exchange

XCH PXCH

D1, D2 (D1)→(D2), (D2)→(D1) 5

F16 P16

32-bit data exchange

DXCH PDXCH

D1, D2 (D1+1, D1)→(D2+1, D2) (D2+1, D2)→(D1+1, D1) 5

F17 P17

Higher/lower byte in 16-bit data exchange

SWAP PSWAP

D The higher byte and lower byte of “D” are exchanged. 3

F18 P18

16-bit data block exchange

BXCH PBXCH

D1, D2, D3

Exchange the data between “D1” and “D2” with the data specified by “D3”. 7

Control instruction F19

Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction specified by “S” and continues from there. 3

Binary arithmetic instructions F20 P20

16-bit data addition

+ P+

S, D (D)+(S)→(D) 5

F21 P21


D+ PD+

S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7

F22 P22


+ P+

S1, S2, D

(S1)+(S2)→(D) 7

F23 P23


D+ PD+

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11

F25 P25

16-bit data subtraction

- P-

S, D (D)-(S)→(D) 5

F26 P26


D- PD-

S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7

F27 P27


- P-

S1, S2, D

(S1)-(S2)→(D) 7

F28 P28


D- PD-

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11

F30 P30

16-bit data multiplication

* P*

S1, S2, D

(S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D) 7

F31 P31

32-bit data multiplication

D* PD*

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2, D+1, D) 11

F32 P32

16-bit data division

% P%

S1, S2, D

(S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D) remainder (DT9015) 7

F33 P33

32-bit data division

D% PD%

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient (D+1, D) remainder (DT9016, DT9015) 11

F34 P34

16-bit data multiplication (result in 16 bits)

*W P*W

S1, S2, D

(S1)X(S2)→(D)

7

F35 P35

16-bit data increment

+1 P+1

D (D)+1→(D) 3

F36 P36

32-bit data increment

D+1 PD+1

D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D) 3

F37 P37

16-bit data decrement

-1 P-1

D (D)-1→(D) 3

F38 P38

32-bit data decrement

D-1 PD-1

D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D) 3

F39 P39

32-bit data multiplication (result in 32 bits)

D*D PD*D

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)x(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)

11




Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

BCD arithmetic instructions F40 P40

4-digit BCD data addition

B+ PB+

S, D (D)+(S)→(D) 5

F41 P41


DB+ PDB+

S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7

F42 P42


B+ PB+

S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)→(D) 7

F43 P43


DB+ PDB+

S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11

F45 P45

4-digit BCD data subtraction

B- PB-

S, D (D)-(S)→(D) 5

F46 P46


DB- PDB-

S, D (D+1, D)-(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7

F47 P47


B- PB-

S1, S2, D (S1)-(S2)→(D) 7

F48 P48


DB- PDB-

S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)-(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 11

F50 P50

4-digit BCD data multiplication

B* PB*

S1, S2, D (S1)X(S2)→(D+1, D) 7

F51 P51

8-digit BCD data multiplication

DB* PDB*

S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)X(S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2, D+1, D)

11

F52 P52

4-digit BCD data division

B% PB%

S1, S2, D (S1)÷(S2)→quotient (D) remainder (DT9015)

7

F53 P53

8-digit BCD data division

DB% PDB%

S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→quotient (D+1, D) remainder (DT9016, DT9015)

11

F55 P55

4-digit BCD data increment

B+1 PB+1

D (D)+1→(D) 3

F56 P56

8-digit BCD data increment

DB+1 PDB+1

D (D+1, D)+1→(D+1, D) 3

F57 P57

4-digit BCD data decrement

B-1 PB-1

D (D)-1→(D) 3

F58 P58

8-digit BCD data decrement

DB-1 PDB-1

D (D+1, D)-1→(D+1, D) 3

Data compare instructions F60 P60

16-bit data compare

CMP PCMP

S1, S2 (S1)>(S2)→R900A: on (S1)=(S2)→R900B: on (S1)<(S2)→R900C: on

5

F61 P61

32-bit data compare

DCMP PDCMP

S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→R900A: on (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→R900B: on (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on

9

F62 P62

16-bit data band compare

WIN PWIN

S1, S2, S3

(S1)>(S3)→R900A: on (S2)< or=(S1)< or=(S3)→R900B: on (S1)<(S2)→R900C: on

7



Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F63 P63

32-bit data band compare

DWIN PDWIN

S1, S2, S3

(S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→R900A: on (S2+1, S2)< or=(S1+1, S1)< or=(S3+1, S3)→R900B: on (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→R900C: on

13

F64 P64

Block data compare

BCMP PBCMP

S1, S2, S3

Compares the two blocks beginning with “S2” and “S3” to see if they are equal. 7

Logic operation instructions F65 P65

16-bit data AND

WAN PWAN

S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2)→(D) 7

F66 P66

16-bit data OR

WOR PWOR

S1, S2, D (S1) OR (S2)→(D) 7

F67 P67

16-bit data exclusive OR

XOR PXOR

S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2) OR (S1) AND (S2)→(D) 7

F68 P68

16-bit data exclusive NOR

XNR PXNR

S1, S2, D (S1) AND (S2) OR (S1) AND (S2)→(D) 7

F69 P69

16-bit data unite

WUNI PWUNI

S1, S2, S3, D

([S1] AND [S3]) OR ([S2] AND [S3])→(D) When (S3) is H0, (S2)→(D) When (S3) is HFFFF, (S1) →(D)

9

Data conversion instructions F70 P70

Block check code calculation

BCC PBCC

S1, S2, S3, D

Creates the code for checking the data specified by “S2” and “S3” and stores it in “D”. The calculation method is specified by “S1”.

9

F71 P71

Hexadecimal data → ASCII code

HEXA PHEXA

S1, S2, D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”. Example: HABCD→ H 42 41 44 43

7

B A D C

F72 P72

ASCII code → Hexadeci-mal data

AHEX PAHEX

S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to hexadecimal data and stores it in “D”. Example: H 44 43 42 41

7 → HCDAB

D C B A

F73 P73

4-digit BCD data → ASCII code

BCDA PBCDA

S1, S2, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by “S1” and “S2” to ASCII code and stores it in “D”. Example: H1234→ H 32 31 34 33

7

2 1 4 3

F74 P74

ASCII code → 4-digit BCD data

ABCD PABCD

S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”. Example: H 34 33 32 31

9 → H3412

4 3 2 1

F75 P75

16-bit binary data → ASCII code

BINA PBINA

S1, S2, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by “S1” to ASCII code and stores it in “D” (area of “S2” bytes). Example: K-100→ H 30 30 31 2D 20 20

7

0 0 1 -




Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F76 P76

ASCII code → 16-bit binary data

ABIN PABIN

S1, S2, D

Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”. Example: H 30 30 31 2D 20 20

7 → K-100

0 0 1 -

F77 P77

32-bit binary data → ASCII code

DBIA PDBIA

S1, S2, D

Converts the 32 bits of binary data (S1+1, S1) to ASCII code and stores it in D (area of “S2” bytes).

11

F78 P78

ASCII code → 32-bit binary data

DABI PDABI

S1, S2, D

Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and “S2” to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in (D+1, D).

11

F80 P80

16-bit binary data → 4-digit BCD data

BCD PBCD

S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by “S” to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”. Example: K100 → H100

5

F81 P81

4-digit BCD data → 16-bit binary data

BIN PBIN

S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by “S” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”. Example: H100 → K100

5

F82 P82

32-bit binary data → 8-digit BCD data

DBCD PDBCD

S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by (S+1, S) to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in (D+1, D). 7

F83 P83

8-digit BCD data → 32-bit binary data

DBIN PDBIN

S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in (D+1, D).

7

F84 P84

16-bit data invert (com-plement of 1)

INV PINV

D Inverts each bit of data of “D”. 3

F85 P85

16-bit data complement of 2

NEG PNEG

D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3

F86 P86

32-bit data complement of 2

DNEG PDNEG

D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and adds 1 (inverts the sign). 3

F87 P87

16-bit data absolute

ABS PABS

D Gives the absolute value of the data of “D”. 3

F88 P88

32-bit data absolute

DABS PDABS

D Gives the absolute value of the data of (D+1, D). 3

F89 P89

16-bit data sign extension

EXT PEXT

D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32 bits in (D+1, D). 3

F90 P90

Decode DECO PDECO

S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”.

7

F91 P91

7-segment decode

SEGT PSEGT

S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-segment display and stores it in (D+1, D).

5

F92 P92

Encode ENCO PENCO

S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. The part is specified by “n”.

7

F93 P93

16-bit data combine

UNIT PUNIT

S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the “n” words of data beginning at “S” are stored (united) in order in “D”.

7



Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F94 P94

16-bit data distribute DIST PDIST

S, n, D

Each of the digits of the data of “S” are stored in (distributed to) the least significant digits of the areas beginning at “D”.

7

F95 P95

Character→ ASCII code

ASC PASC

S, D Twelve characters of the character constants of “S” are converted to ASCII code and stored in “D” to “D+5”.

15

F96 P96

16-bit table data search

SRC PSRC

S1, S2, S3

The data of “S1” is searched for in the areas in the range “S2” to “S3” and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038

7

F97 P97

32-bit table data search

DSRC PDSRC

S1, S2, S3

The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched for in the 32-bit data designated by “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038.

11

Data shift instructions F98 P98

Data table shift-out and compress

CMPR PCMPR

D1, D2, D3

Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of the data between “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed, and shifted in order toward “D2”.

7

F99 P99

Data table shift-in and compress

CMPW PCMPW

S, D1, D2

Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the data between “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed, and shifted in order toward “D2”.

7

F100 P100

Right shift of multiple bits (n bits) in a 16-bit data

SHR PSHR

D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right. 5

F101 P101

Left shift of multiple bits (n bits) in a 16-bit data

SHL PSHL

D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left. 5

F102 P102

Right shift of n bits in a 32-bit data

DSHR PDSHR

D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified by (D+1, D) to the right.

5

F103 P103

Left shift of n bits in a 32-bit data

DSHL PDSHL

D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified by (D+1, D) to the left. 5

F105 P105

Right shift of one hexadecimal digit (4-bit)

BSR PBSR

D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the right. 3

F106 P106

Left shift of one hexadecimal digit (4-bit)

BSL PBSL

D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the left. 3

F108 P108

Right shift of multiple bits (n bits)

BITR PBITR

D1, D2, n

Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to the right. 7

F109 P109

Left shift of multiple bits (n bits)

BITL PBITL

D1, D2, n

Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to the left. 7

F110 P110

Right shift of one word (16-bit)

WSHR PWSHR

D1, D2

Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5

F111 P111

Left shift of one word (16-bit)

WSHL PWSHL

D1, D2

Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5

F112 P112

Right shift of one hexadecimal digit (4-bit)

WBSR PWBSR

D1, D2

Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the right. 5

F113 P113

Left shift of one hexadecimal digit (4-bit)

WBSL PWBSL

D1, D2

Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to the left. 5




Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

FIFO instructions F115 P115

FIFO buffer define FIFT PFIFT

n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are defined in the buffer. 5

F116 P116

Data read from FIFO buffer

FIFR PFIFR

S, D The oldest data beginning from “S” that was written to the buffer is read and stored in “D”.

5

F117 P117

Data write into FIFO buffer

FIFW PFIFW

S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer starting from “D”. 5

Basic function instructions F118

UP/DOWN counter

UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value preset in “S” and stores the elapsed value in “D”.

5

F119

Left/right shift register

LRSR D1, D2

Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area between “D1” and “D2” as the register.

5

Data rotate instructions F120 P120

16-bit data right rotate

ROR PROR

D, n Rotates the “n” bits in data of “D” to the right. 5

F121 P121

16-bit data left rotate

ROL PROL

D, n Rotates the “n” bits in data of “D” to the left. 5

F122 P122

16-bit data right rotate with carry flag (R9009) data

RCR PRCR

D, n Rotates the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the right.

5

F123 P123

16-bit data left rotate with carry flag (R9009) data

RCL PRCL

D, n Rotates the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the left.

5

F125 P125

32-bit data right rotate

DROR PDROR

D, n Rotates the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the right.

5

F126 P126

32-bit data left rotate

DROL PDROL

D, n Rotates the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left.

5

F127 P127

32-bit data right rotate with carry flag (R9009) data

DRCR PDRCR

D, n Rotates the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the right together with carry flag (R9009) data.

5

F128 P128

32-bit data left rotate with carry flag (R9009) data

DRCL PDRCL

D, n Rotates the number of bits specified by “n” of the double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to the left together with carry flag (R9009) data.

5

Bit manipulation instructions F130 P130

16-bit data bit set BTS PBTS

D, n Sets the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 1. 5

F131 P131

16-bit data bit reset

BTR PBTR

D, n Sets the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 0. 5

F132 P132

16-bit data invert BTI PBTI

D, n Inverts the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D”. 5

F133 P133

16-bit data bit test BTT PBTT

D, n Tests the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” and outputs the result to R900B.

5

F135 P135

Number of on (1) bits in 16-bit data

BCU PBCU

S, D Stores the number of on bits in the data of “S” in “D”. 5



Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F136 P136

Number of on (1) bits in 32-bit data

DBCU PDBCU

S, D Stores the number of on bits in the data of (S+1, S) in “D”. 7

Basic function instruction F137


STMR S, D Turns on the specified output and R900D after 0.01 s × set value. 5

Special instructions F138 P138

Hours, min-utes and sec-onds to seconds data

HMSS PHMSS

S, D Converts the hour, minute and second data of (S+1, S) to seconds data, and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D). 5

*1

F139 P139

Seconds to hours, minutes and seconds data

SHMS PSHMS

S, D Converts the seconds data of (S+1, S) to hour, minute and second data, and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D).

5 *1

F140 P140

Carry flag (R9009) set

STC PSTC

- Turns on the carry flag (R9009). 1

F141 P141

Carry flag (R9009) reset

CLC PCLC

- Turns off the carry flag (R9009). 1

F142 P142

Watching dog timer update

WDT PWDT

S The time (allowable scan time for the system) of watching dog timer is changed to “S” × 0.1 (ms) for that scan.

3

F143 P143

Partial I/O update

IORF PIORF

D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number specified by “D1” to the number specified by “D2”.

5

F144

Serial data communica-tion control

TRNS S, n The COM port received flag (R9038) is set to off to enable reception. Beginning at “S”, “n” bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port.

5 *4

F145 P145

Data send SEND PSEND

S1, S2, D, N

Sends the data to another station in the network (MEWNET). (via link unit) 9

F146 P146

Data receive RECV PRECV

S1, S2, N, D

Receives the data to another station in the network (MEWNET). (via link unit) 9

F145 P145

Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N

Sends the data to the slave station as the MOD bus master. (via COM port) 9

*2

F146 P146

Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D

Receives the data from the slave station as the MOD bus master. (via COM port) 9

*2

F145 P145


Sends the data to the slave station of the MOD bus master, type II. 9

*3

*3

F146 P146


Receives the data from the slave station of the MOD bus master, type II. 9

*3

*3

F145 P145


Sends the data to the slave station as the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM port) 9

*2

*2

F146 P146


Receives the data from the slave station as the MEWTOCOL master. (via COM port)

9 *2

*2

F147

Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with “S” for printing, and outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by “D”.

5

F148 P148

Self-diagnostic error set

ERR PERR

n (n: k100 to K299)

Stores the self-diagnostic error number “n” in (DT9000), turns R9000 on, and turns on the ERROR LED.

3

F149 P149

Message display

MSG PMSG

S Displays the character constant of “S” in the connected programming tool. 13

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 type (V2.3 or later). *2) This instruction is available for FP-X V1.20 or later and FPΣ 32k type. *3) This instruction is available for FP-X V2.50 or later and FPΣ V3.20 or later. *4) This instruction is available for FP0 V1.20 or later.


Num-ber Name Boolean

Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F150 P150

Data read from intelligent unit

READ PREAD

S1, S2, n, D

Reads the data from the intelligent unit. 9

*3

F151 P151

Data write into intelligent unit

WRT PWRT

S1, S2, n, D

Writes the data into the intelligent unit. 9

*3

F152 P152

Data read from MEWNET-F slave station

RMRD PRMRD

S1, S2, n, D

Reads the data from the intelligent unit at the MEWNET-F (remote I/O) slave station.

9

F153 P153

Data write into MEWNET-F slave station

RMWT PRMWT

S1, S2, n, D

Writes the data into the intelligent unit at the MEWNET-F (remote I/O) slave station.

9

F155 P155

Sampling SMPL PSMPL

- Starts sampling data. 1 *5 *4

F156 P156

Sampling trigger

STRG PSTRG

- When the trigger of this instruction turns on, the sampling trace stops.

1 *5 *4

F157 P157

Time addition CADD PCADD

S1, S2, D

The time after (S2+1, S2) elapses from the time of (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, D).

9 *1

F158 P158

Time subtraction

CSUB PCSUB

S1, S2, D

The time that results from subtracting (S2+1, S2) from the time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, D).

9 *1

F159 P159

Serial port communication

MTRN PMTRN

S, n, D This is used to send data to an external device through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM port.

7 *2

*2

F161 P161

MCU serial port reception

MRCV PMRCV

S, D1, D2

Data is received from external equipment via the COM port of the specified MCU.

7 *2

*2

BIN arithmetic instruction F160 P160

Double word (32-bit) data square root

DSQR PDSQR

S, D √(S)→(D) 7

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0, FP-e

F0

High-speed counter and Pulse output controls

MV S, DT9052

Performs high-speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by “S”. The control code is stored in DT9052.

5

1 Change and read of the elapsed value of high-speed counter and Pulse output

DMV S, DT9044

Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area.

7

DT9044, D

Transfers value in high-speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area to (D+1, D).

7

F166

High-speed counter output set (with channel specification)

HC1S n, S, Yn Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value of (S+1, S).

11

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) The instruction is available for FP0 T32 type (V2.3 or later). *2) The instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later, and the pulse execution type can be specified. FP10SH cannot be used. *3) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 2.0 or later. *4) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later. *5) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.


Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Operand Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F167

High-speed counter output reset (with channel specification)

HC1R n, S, Yn Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value of (S+1, S).

11

F168

Positioning control (with channel specification)

SPD1 S, n Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified output (Y0 or Y1) according to the contents of the data table beginning at “S”.

5

F169

Pulse output (with channel specification)

PLS S, n Outputs a pulse from the specified output (Y0 or Y1) according to the contents of the data table beginning at “S”.

5

F170 PWM output (with channel specification)

PWM S, n Performs PWM output from the specified output (Y0 or Y1) according to the contents of the data table beginning at “S”.

5

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FP0R F0


MV S, DT90052

Performs high-speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by “S”. The control code is stored in DT90052.

5

F1

Change and read of the elapsed value of high-speed counter and Pulse output

DMV S, DT90300

Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area (DT90045, DT90044).

7

DT90300, D

Transfers value in high-speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area (DT90045, DT90044) to (D+1, D).

7

F165

Cam control CAM0 S Controls cam operation (on/off patterns of each cam output) according to the elapsed value of the high-speed counter.

3

F166

Target value much on (with channel specification) (High-speed counter control/Pulse output control)

HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the high-speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of (S+1, S). 11

F167

Target value much off (with channel specification) (High-speed counter control/Pulse output control)

HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the high-speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of (S+1, S). 11

F171

Pulse output (JOG positioning type 0/1) (Trapezoidal control)

SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S.

5

F172

Pulse output (JOG operation 0 and 1)

PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the specified output, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S.

5

F173

PWM output (with channel specification)

PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the specified output, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S.

5


Num-ber Name Boo-lean Operand Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F174

Pulse output (Selectable data table control operation )

SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S.

5

F175

Pulse output (Linear interpolation)

SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with the designated data table, so that the path to the target position forms a straight line.

5

F176

Pulse output (Circular interpolation)

SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with the designated data table, so that the path to the target position forms an arc.

5

F177 Pulse output (Home return)

HOME S, n Performs the home return according to the specified data table.

7

F178 Input pulse measurement (No. of pulses, cycle for input pulses)

PLSM S1, S2, D Measures the number of pulses and cycle of pulses to be input to the high-speed counter of the specified channel.

5


Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Operand Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

High speed counter/Pulse output instruction for FPΣ/FP-X F0


MV S, DT90052 Performs high-speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by “S”. The control code is stored in DT90052.

5

F1

Change and read of the elapsed value of high-speed counter and Pulse output

DMV FPΣ: S, DT90044 FP-X: S, DT90300

Transfers (S+1, S) to high-speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area (DT90045, DT90044).

7

FPΣ: DT90044, D FP-X: DT90300, D

Transfers value in high-speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area (DT90045, DT90044) to (D+1, D).

7

F166

Target value much on (with channel specification)

HC1S n, S, D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value of (S+1, S).

11

F167

Target value much off (with channel specification)

HC1R n, S, D Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built-in high-speed counter reaches the target value of (S+1, S).

11

F171

Pulse output (with channel specification) (Trapezoidal control and home return)

SPDH S, n Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S. 5

F172

Pulse output (with channel specification) (JOG operation)

PLSH S, n Pulse strings are output from the specified output, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S.

5

F173

PWM output (with channel specification)

PWMH S, n PWM output is output from the specified output, in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S.

5

F174

Pulse output (with channel specification) (Selectable data table control operation )

SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S. 5

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F175

Pulse output (Linear interpolation)

SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with the designated data table, so that the path to the target position forms a straight line.

5 *3

F176

Pulse output (Circular interpolation)

SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with the designated data table, so that the path to the target position forms an arc.

5 *3

Screen display instructions F180

FP-e screen display registration

SCR S1, S2, S3, S4

Register the screen displayed on the FP-e. 9

F181

FP-e screen display switching

DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed on the FP-e. 3

Basic function instruction F182

Time constant processing

FILTR S1, S2, S3, D

Executes the filter processing for the specified input. 9

*5

*4

F183


DSTM S, D Turn on the specified output and R900D after 0.01 s. × set value.

7 *7

Data transfer instructions F190 P190

Three 16-bit data move

MV3 PMV3

S1, S2, S3, D

(S1)→(D), (S2)→(D+1), (S3)→(D+2) 10

F191 P191

Three 32-bit data move

DMV3 PDMV3

S1, S2, S3, D

(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D), (S2+1, S2)→(D+3, D+2), (S3+1, S3)→(D+5, D+4)

16

Logic operation instructions F215 P215

32-bit data AND

DAND PDAND

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)→(D+1,D)

7

F216 P216

32-bit data OR

DOR PDOR

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1) OR (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 12

F217 P217

32-bit data XOR

DXOR PDXOR

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1

12 ) AND (S2+1, S2) OR

(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)

F218 P218

32-bit data XNR

DXNR PDXNR

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S112

) AND (S2+1, S2) OR (S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)

F219 P219

Double word (32-bit) data unites

DUNI PDUNI

S1, S2, S3, D

(S1+1, S1) AND (S3+1, S316

) OR (S2+1, S2) AND (S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)

Data conversion instructions F230 P230

Time data → second conversion

TMSEC PTMSEC

S, D The specified time data ( a date and time) is changed to the second data.

6 *2

*6

*1

*1

F231 P231

Second data→ time conversion

SECTM PSECTM

S, D The specified second data is changed into time data (a date and time).

6 *2

*6

*1

*1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later.FP10SH cannot be used. *2) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type. *3) This instruction is available for FPΣ C32T2, C28P2, C32T2H and C28P2H. *4) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later. *5) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later. *6) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 1.13 or later. *7) This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver. 3.10 or later.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F235 P235

16-bit binary data → Gray code conversion

GRY PGRY

S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of “S” to gray codes, and the converted result is stored in the “D”.

6

F236 P236

32-bit binary data → Gray code conversion

DGRY PDGRY

S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of (S+1, S) to gray code, and the converted result is stored in the (D+1, D).

8

F237 P237

16-bit gray code → binary data conversion

GBIN PGBIN

S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to binary data, and the converted result is stored in the “D”.

6

F238 P238

32-bit gray code → binary data conversion

DGBIN PDGBIN

S, D Converts the gray codes of (S+1, S) to binary data, and the converted result is stored in the (D+1, D).

8

F240 P240

Bit line to bit column conversion

COLM PCOLM

S, n, D

The values of bits 0 to 15 of “S” are stored in bit “n” of (D to DC+15). 8

F241 P241

Bit column to bit line conversion

LINE PLINE

S, n, D

The values of bit “n” of (S) to (S+15) are stored in bits 0 to 15 of “D”. 8

F250 Binary data → ASCII conversion

BTOA S1, S2, n, D

Converts multiple binary data to multiple ASCII data. 12 *1

F251 ASCII → binary data conversion

ATOB S1, S2, n, D

Converts multiple ASCII data to multiple binary data. 12 *1

F252 ASCII data check

ACHK S1, S2, n

Checks the ASCII data strings to be used in F251 (ATOB) instruction. 10 *3 *2

Character strings instructions F257 P257

Comparing character strings

SCMP S1, S2

These instructions compare two specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay.

10

F258 P258

Character string coupling

SADD S1, S2, D

These instructions couple one character string with another. 12

F259 P259

Number of characters in a character string

LEN S, D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string.

6

F260 P260

Search for character string

SSRC S1, S2, D

The specified character is searched in a character string. 10

F261 P261

Retrieving data from character strings (right side)

RIGHT S1, S2, D

These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the right side of the character string. 8

F262 P262

Retrieving data from character strings (left side)

LEFT S1, S2, D

These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string. 8

F263 P263

Retrieving a character string from a character string

MIDR S1, S2, S3, D

These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified position in the character string.

10

F264 P264

Writing a character string to a character string

MIDW S1, S2, D, n

These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string.

12

F265 P265

Replacing character strings

SREP S, D, p, n

A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten, starting from a specified position in the character string.

12

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type. *2) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later. *3) This instruction is available for FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Integer type data processing instructions F270 P270

Maximum value (word data (16-bit))

MAX PMAX

S1, S2, D

Searches the maximum value in the word data table between the “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+1”.

8 *1

F271 P271

Maximum value (double word data (32-bit))

DMAX PDMAX

S1, S2, D

Searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.

8 *1

F272 P272

Minimum value (word data (16-bit))

MIN PMIN

S1, S2, D

Searches for the minimum value in the word data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+1”.

8 *1

F273 P273

Minimum value (double word data (32-bit))

DMIN PDMIN

S1, S2, D

Searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.

8 *1

F275 P275

Total and mean values (word data (16-bit))

MEAN PMEAN

S1, S2, D

The total value and the mean value of the word data with sign from the area selected with “S1” to “S2” are obtained and stored in the “D”.

8 *1

F276 P276

Total and mean values (double word data (32-bit))

DMEAN PDMEAN

S1, S2, D

The total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with “S1” to “S2” are obtained and stored in the “D”.

8 *1

F277 P277

Sort (word data (16-bit))

SORT PSORT

S1, S2, S3

The word data with sign from the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are sorted in ascending order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first).

8 *1

F278 P278

Sort (double word data (32-bit))

DSORT PDSORT

S1, S2, S3

The double word data with sign from the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are sorted in ascending order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first).

8 *1

F282 P282

Scaling of 16-bit data

SCAL PSCAL

S1, S2, D

The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table.

8 *1

F283 P283

Scaling of 32-bit data

DSCAL PDSCAL

S1, S2, D

The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table.

10

F284 P284

Inclination output of 16-bit data

RAMP S1, S2, S3, D

Executes the linear output for the specified time from the specified initial value to the target value.

10 *2

*2

Integer type non-linear function instructions F285 P285

Upper and lower limit control (16-bit data)

LIMT PLIMT

S1, S2, S3, D

When S1>S3, S1→D When S1<S3, S2→D When S1<or = S3<or = S2, S3→D 10 *

1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later. *2) This instruction is only available for FP-X Ver.2.0 or later, and FPΣ Ver. 3.10 or later.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FP

Σ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F286 P286

Upper and lower limit control (32-bit data)

DLIMT PDLIMT

S1, S2, S3, D

When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or = (S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)

16 *1

F287 P287

Deadband control (16-bit data)

BAND PBAND

S1, S2, S3, D

When S1>S3, S3−S1→D When S2<S3, S3−S2→D When S1<or = S3<or = S2, 0→D

10 *1

F288 P288

Deadband control (32-bit data)

DBAND PDBAND

S1, S2, S3, D

When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or = (S2+1, S2),0→(D+1, D)

16 *1

F289 P289

Zone control (16-bit data)

ZONE PZONE

S1, S2, S3, D

When S3<0, S3+S1→D When S3=0, 0→D When S3>0, S3+S2→D

10 *1

F290 P290

Zone control (32-bit data)

DZONE PDZONE

S1, S2, S3, D

When (S3+1, S3)<0, (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3)=0, 0→(D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3)>0, (S3+1, S3)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D)

16 *1

BCD type real number operation instructions F300 P300

BCD type sine operation

BSIN PBSIN

S, D SIN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6

F301 P301

BCD type cosine operation

BCOS PBCOS

S, D COS(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6

F302 P302

BCD type tangent operation

BTAN PBTAN

S, D TAN(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6

F303 P303

BCD type arcsine operation

BASIN PBASIN

S, D SIN-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6

F304 P304

BCD type arccosine operation

BACOS PBACOS

S, D COS-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6

F305 P305

BCD type arctangent operation

BATAN PBATAN

S, D TAN-1(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) 6

Floating-point type real number operation instructions F309 P309

Floating-point type data move

FMV PFMV

S, D (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 8 *2 *2

F310 P310

Floating-point type data addition

F+ PF+

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)+(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14

*2 *2

F311 P311

Floating-point type data subtraction

F- PF-

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)−(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14

*2 *2

F312 P312

Floating-point type data multiplication

F* PF*

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)×(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14

*2 *2

F313 P313

Floating-point type data division

F% PF%

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1)÷(S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14

*2 *2

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.2 or later. *2) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, FP0 V2.1 or later.


Num-ber Name Boo-

lean Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F314 P314

Floating-point type data sine operation

SIN PSIN

S, D SIN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10 *1 *1

F315 P315

Floating-point type data cosine operation

COS PCOS

S, D COS(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F316 P316

Floating-point type data tangent operation

TAN PTAN

S, D TAN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F317 P317

Floating-point type data arcsine operation

ASIN PASIN

S, D SIN-1(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F318 P318

Floating-point type data arccosine operation

ACOS PACOS

S, D COS-1(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F319 P319

Floating-point type data arctangent operation

ATAN PATAN

S, D TAN-1(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F320 P320

Floating-point type data natural logarithm

LN PLN

S, D LN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F321 P321

Floating-point type data exponent

EXP PEXP

S, D EXP(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F322 P322

Floating-point type data logarithm

LOG PLOG

S, D LOG(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10 *1 *1

F323 P323

Floating-point type data power

PWR PPWR

S1, S2, D

(S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14

*1 *1

F324 P324

Floating-point type data square root

FSQR PFSQR

S, D √(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10

*1 *1

F325 P325

16-bit integer data to floating-point type data conversion

FLT PFLT

S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data with sign specified by “S” to real number data, and the converted data is stored in “D”.

6 *1 *1

F326 P326

32-bit integer data to floating-point type data conversion

DFLT PDFLT

S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data with sign specified by (S+1, S) to real number data, and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F327 P327

Floating-point type data to 16-bit integer con-version (the largest integer not exceeding the floating-point type data)

INT PINT

S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data with sign (the largest integer not exceeding the floating-point data), and the converted data is stored in “D”.

8 *1 *1

F328 P328

Floating-point type data to 32-bit integer con-version (the largest integer not exceeding the floating-point type data)

DINT PDINT

S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data with sign (the largest integer not exceeding the floating-point data), and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, FP0 V2.1 or later.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F329 P329

Floating-point type data to 16-bit integer con-version (rounding the first decimal point down to integer)

FIX PFIX

S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point down), and the converted data is stored in “D”.

8 *1 *1

F330 P330

Floating-point type data to 32-bit integer con-version (rounding the first decimal point down to integer)

DFIX PDFIX

S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point down), and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F331 P331

Floating-point type data to 16-bit integer con-version (rounding the first decimal point off to integer)

ROFF PROFF

S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 16-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point off), and the converted data is stored in “D”.

8 *1 *1

F332 P332

Floating-point type data to 32-bit integer con-version (rounding the first decimal point off to integer)

DROFF PDROFF

S, D Converts real number data specified by (S+1, S) to the 32-bit integer data with sign (rounding the first decimal point off), and the converted data is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F333 P333

Floating-point type data round-ding the first decimal point down

FINT PFINT

S, D The decimal part of the real number data specified in (S+1, S) is rounded down, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F334 P334

Floating-point type data round-ding the first decimal point off

FRINT PFRINT

S, D The decimal part of the real number data stored in (S+1, S) is rounded off, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F335 P335

Floating-point type data sign changes

F+/- PF+/-

S, D The real number data stored in (S+1, S) is changed the sign, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F336 P336

Floating-point type data absolute

FABS PFABS

S, D Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by (S+1, S), and the result (absolute value) is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F337 P337

Floating-point type data degree → radian

RAD PRAD

S, D The data in degrees of an angle specified in (S+1, S) is converted to radians (real number data), and the result is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

F338 P338

Floating-point type data radian → degree

DEG PDEG

S, D The angle data in radians (real number data) specified in (S+1, S) is converted to angle data in degrees, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).

8 *1 *1

Floating-point type real number data processing instructions F345 P345

Floating-point type data compare

FCMP PFCMP

S1, S2

(S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→ R900A: on (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→ R900B on (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on

10

F346 P346

Floating-point type data band compare

FWIN PFWIN

S1, S2, S3

(S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→ R900A: on (S2+1, S2)<or =(S1+1, S1)<or =(S3+1, S3) → R900B on (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on

14

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP-e Ver.1.21 or later, FP0 V2.1 or later.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP

0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

F347 P347

Floating-point type data upper and lower limit control

FLIMT PFLIMT

S1, S2, S3, D

When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) →(D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2) → (D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), (S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)

17

F348 P348

Floating-point type data dead-band control

FBAND PFBAND

S1, S2, S3, D

When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1, S2)→ (D+1, D) When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or =(S2+1, S2), 0.0→(D+1, D)

17

F349 P349

Floating-point type data zone control

FZONE PFZONE

S1, S2, S3, D

When (S3+1, S3)<0.0, (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3)=0.0, 0.0→ (D+1, D) When (S3+1, S3)>0.0, (S3+1, S3)+(S2+1, S2) →(D+1, D)

17

F350 P350

Floating-point type data maxi-mum value

FMAX PFMAX

S1, S2, D

Searches the maximum value in the real number data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the (D+1, D). The address relative to “S1” is stored in (D+2).

8

F351 P351

Floating-point type data mini-mum value

FMIN PFMIN

S1, S2, D

Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the (D+1, D). The address relative to “S1” is stored in (D+2).

8

F352 P352

Floating-point type data total and mean values

FMEAN PFMEAN

S1, S2, D

The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with “S1” to “S2” are obtained. The total value is stored in the (D+1, D) and the mean value is stored in the (D+3, D+2).

8

F353 P353

Floating-point type data sort

FSORT PFSORT

S1, S2, S3

The real number data from the area specified by “S1” to “S2” are stored in ascending order (the smallest word is first) or descending order (the largest word is first).

8

F354 P354

Scaling of real number data

FSCAL PFSCAL

S1, S2, D

Scaling (linearization) on a real number data table is performed, and the output (Y) to an input value (X) is calculated.

12 *2 *3 *1 *1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is available for FP2/FP2SH Ver. 1.5 or later. FP10SH cannot be used. *2) This instruction is available for FPΣ 32k type. *3) This instruction is available for FP-X Ver. 1.13 or later.



Ope-rand

Description

Step

s

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H/F

P10S

H

Time series processing instruction F355

PID processing PID S PID processing is performed depending on the control value (mode and parameter) specified by (S to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), and the result is stored in the (S+3).

4 *3

F356 Easy PID

EZPID S1, S2, S3, S4

Temperature control (PID) can be easily performed using the image of a temperature controller.

10 *2

*2

Compare instructions F373 P373

16-bit data revision detection

DTR PDTR

S, D If the data in the 16-bit area specified by “S” has changed since the previous execution, internal relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. “D” is used to store the data of the previous execution.

6

F374 P374

32-bit data revision detection

DDTR PDDTR

S, D If the data in the 32-bit area specified by (S+1, S) has changed since the previous execution, internal relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. (D+1, D) is used to store the data of the previous execution.

6

Index register bank processing instructions F410 P410

Setting the index register bank number

SETB PSETB

n Index register (I0 to ID) bank number change over. 4

F411 P411

Changing the index register bank number

CHGB PCHGB

n Index register (I0 to ID) bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number.

4

F412 P412

Restoring the index register bank number

POPB PPOPB

- Changes index register (I0 to ID) bank number back to the bank before F411 (CHGB)/P411 (PCHGB) instruction.

2

File register bank processing instructions F414 P414

Setting the file register bank number

SBFL PSBFL

n File register bank number change over. 4

*1

F415 P415

Changing the file register bank number

CBFL PCBFL

n File register bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number.

4 *1

F416 P416

Restoring the file register bank number

PBFL PPBFL

- Changes file register bank number back to the bank before F415 (CBFL)/P415 (PCBFL) instruction.

2 *1

: Available, : Not available, : Not available partially *1) This instruction is not available for FP10SH. *2) This instruction is available for FP-X V.1.20 or later, and FPΣ 32k type. *3) This instruction is available for FP0 V2.1 or later.


14.4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model. Model Display Display method FP1,FP-M,FP2,FP3,FP10SH LED ERROR. Continually lit FPΣ,FP0, FP0R, FP-X LED ERROR/ALARM Flashes/continually lit FP-e Screen display ERR. Continually lit Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the “ERROR” on the control unit (CPU unit) turns on or flashes, a self-diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps. -Error Confirmation Method Procedure:1.Use the programming tool software to call up the error code. By executing the “STATUS DISPLAY”, the error code and content of error are displayed. 2.Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above. -Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program. When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode, the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program. When a syntax check error is detected -ERROR turns on or flashes. -Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode. -Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode. Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG. mode, the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off. Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG. mode, and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected. This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred. Correct the program while referring to the content of error.


-Self-diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit (CPU unit) self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection, I/O abnormal detection, and other devices. When a self-diagnostic error occurs - The ERROR turns on or flashes. - The operation of the control unit (CPU unit) might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting. - The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000(DT90000). - In the case of operation error, the error address will stored in the DT9017(DT90017) and DT9018(DT90018). Clearing the self-diagnostic error At the “STATUS DISPLAY”, execute the “error clear”. Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared. -You can use the initialize/test switch to clear an error. However, this will also clear the contents of operation memory. -Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG. mode. However, the contents of operation memory, not stored with the hold type data, will also be cleared. -The error can also be cleared depending on the self-diagnostic error set instruction F148(ERR). Steps to take for self-diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents. For more details, use the error code obtained above and consult the table of a self-diagnostic error codes. MEWTOCOL-COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL-COM.


Table of Syntax Check Error

Error code Name

Opera-tion

status Description and steps to take

FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E1 Syntax error Stops

A program with a syntax error has been written. ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct the error.

A A A A A A A A

E2 (Note)

Duplicated output error

Stops

Two or more OT(Out) instructions and KP(Keep) instructions are programmed using the same relay. Also occurs when using the same timer/counter number. ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and correct the program so that one relay is not used for two or more OT instructions. Or, set the duplicated output to “enable” in system register 20. A timer/counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected.

A A A A A A A A

E3 Not paired error Stops

For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump (JP and LBL), one instruction is either missing or in an incorrect position. ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions.

A A A A A A A A

E4 Parameter mismatch error

Stops

An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings. For example, the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer/counter range setting. ⇒ Change to PROG. mode, check the system register settings, and change so that the settings and the instruction agree.

A A A A A A A A

E5 (Note)

Program area error Stops

An instruction which must be written in a specific area (main program area or subprogram area) has been written to a different area (for example, a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction). ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and enter the instruction into the correct area.

A A A A A A A A

A:Available Note) This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN. In this case, nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue.


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E6 Compile memory full error

Stops

The program is too large to compile in the program memory. ⇒ Change to PROG. mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program. -FP10SH If memory expansion is possible, compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded.

A A A A A A A

E7 High-level instruction type error

Stops

In the program, high-level instructions, which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger, are programmed to be triggered by one contact. (e.g. F0 (MV) and P0 (PMV) are programmed using the same trigger continuously.) ⇒ Correct the program so that the high-level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately.

A A A A A A

E8

High-level instruction operand combina-tion error

Stops

There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands (for example, the operands must all be of a certain type). ⇒ Enter the correct combination of operands.

A A A A A A A A

E9 No program error

Stops Program may be damaged. ⇒Try to send the program again.

A A

E10

Rewrite during RUN syntax error

Conti-nues

When inputting with the programming tool software, a deletion, addition or change of order of an instruction(ED,LBL,SUB,RET,INT,IRET,SSTP,and STPE) that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted. Nothing is written to the CPU.

A A A

A:Available


Table of Self-Diagnostic Error

Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E20 CPU error Stops Probably a hardware abnormality ⇒Please contact your dealer. A A A

E21 RAM error1

Stops Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM. ⇒Please contact your dealer. A A A

E22 RAM error2

E23 RAM error3

E24 RAM error4

E25 RAM error5

E25

Master memory model unmatch error

Stops The models of master memories are different. Use the master memories created with the same model.

A *1

)

E26 User’s ROM error Stops

FP-e,FP0,FP0R,FPΣ,and FP1 C14,C16:Probably a hardware abnormality. ⇒ Please contact your dealer.

A A A A A A A A

FP-X: When the master memory cassette is mounted, the master memory cassette may be damaged. Remove the master memory, and check whether the ERROR turns off. When the ERROR turned off, rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged, and use it again. When the ERROR does not turn off, please contact your dealer.

FP1 C24,C40,C56,C72,and FP-M: Probably an abnormality in the memory unit ⇒Program the memory unit again and try to operate. If the same error is detected, try to operate with another memory unit. FP2,FP2SH,FP10SH,and FP3: There may be a problem with the installed ROM. -ROM is not installed. -ROM contents are damaged. -Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM ⇒Check the contents of the ROM

E27 Unit installation error

Stops Units installed exceed the limitations.(i.e.,4 or more link units) ⇒ Turn off the power and re-configure units referring to the hardware manual.

A A A A A A

E28 System register error

Stops Probably an abnormality in the system register. ⇒ Check the system register setting or initialize the system registers.

A

*1) This error occurs on FP-X Ver2.0 or later. A:Available


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E29

Configu-ration parameter error

Stops A parameter error was detected in the MEWNET-W2 configuration area. Set a correct parameter.

A A

E30 Interrupt error 0 Stops Probably a hardware abnormality.

⇒ Please contact your dealer.

E31 Interrupt error 1 Stops

An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request . A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible. ⇒ Turn off the power and check the noise conditions.

A A A A A A A A

E32 Interrupt error 2 Stops

There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred. ⇒ Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrupt request..

A A A A A A A A

E33

Multi-CPU data unmatch error

CPU2 Stops

This error occurs when a FP3/FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi-CPU system. ⇒Refer to “Multi-CPU system Manual”.

A A

E34 I/O status error Stops

An abnormal unit is installed. -FPΣ, FP0R(FP0R mode),FP-X, FP2,FP2SH and FP10SH: Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one. -FP3: Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit. Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one.

A A A A A

E35

MEWNET-F slave illegal unit error

Stops

A unit, which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET-F link system, is installed on the slave station. ⇒Remove the illegal unit from the slave station.

A A A

E36

MEWNET-F (remore I/O) limitation error

Stops

The number of slots or I/O points used for MEWNET-F(remote I/O) system exceeds the limitation. ⇒Re-configure the system so that the number of slots and I/O points is within the specified range.

A A A

E37

MEWNET-F I/O mapping error

Stops

I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over the range is detected in the allocated I/O and MEWNET-F I/O map. ⇒Re-configure the I/O map correctly

A A A

A:Available


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E38

MEWNET-F slave I/O terminal mapping error

Stops

I/O mapping for remote I/O terminal boards, remote I/O terminal units and I/O link is not correct. ⇒Re-configure the I/O map for slave stations according to the I/O points of the slave stations.

A A A

E39 IC card read error Stops

When reading in the program from the IC memory card(due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14(PGRD) instruction): - IC memory card is not installed. - There is no program file or it is damaged. - Writing is disabled. - There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC.SPG file. - Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU. ⇒Install an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again.

A A

E40 I/O error Sele-ctable

Abnormal I/O unit. FPΣ, FP-X: Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FPΣ expansion unit (application cassette for FP-X). Then check the unit. FP2 and FP2SH: Check the contents of special data registers DT90002,DT90003 and abnormal I/O unit. Then check the unit. Selection of operation status using system register21: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at “I/O error” in the status display function.

A A A A A

MEWNET-TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH: Check the contents of special data registers(FP3:DT9002,DT9003,FP10SH:DT90002,DT90003) and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I/O unit. Then check the unit. Selection of operation status using system register21: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at “I/O error” in the status display function.

A:Available


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E41 Intelligent unit error

Selec-table

An abnormality in an intelligent unit. FPΣ, FP-X: Check the contents of special data register “DT90006” and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit (application cassette for FP-X). FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH: Check the contents of special data registers DT90006,DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring to its manual.. Selection of operation status using system register22: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0 FP3: Check the contents of special data registers DT9006,DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit. Then check the unit referring to its manual.. Selection of operation status using system register22: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at “I/O error” in the status display function.

A A A A A

E42 I/O unit verify error

Selec-table

I/O unit(Expansion unit) wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power-up. ⇒ Check the contents of special data register (FP0: DT9010, FPΣ, FP-X: DT90010,DT90011) and locate the erroneous expansion unit. It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement. ⇒ Check the contents of special data register (FP2,FP2SH,and FP10SH:DT90010,DT90011,FP3 DT9010,DT9011) Selection of operation status using system register23: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at “I/O error” in the status display function.

A A A A A A A

A:Available


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E43

System watching dog timer error

Selec-table

Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer. ⇒ Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time. Selection of operation status using system register24: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0

A A

E44

Slave station connecting time error for MEWNET-F system

Selec-table

The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35. Selection of operation status using system register25: -to continue operation, set 1 -to stop operation, set 0

A A A

E45 Operation error

Selec-table

Operation became impossible when a high-level instruction was executed. Selection of operation status using system register26: -to continue operation, set K1 -to stop operation, set K0 The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers DT9017 and DT9018, or DT90017 and DT90018. (It varies according to the model to be used.) DT9017, DT9018: FP-e, FP0,

FP0R(FP0 mode) DT90017, DT90018: FP∑, FP-X,

FP0R(FP0R mode), FP2, FP2SH, FP10SH

Verification is possible in FPWIN GR/Pro at “I/O error” in the status display function.

A A A A A A A A

A:Available


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E46

Remote I/O commu-nication error

Selec-table

S-LINK error Occurs only in FP0-SL1 When one of the S-LINK errors (ERR1, 3 or 4) has been detected, error code E46 (remote I/O (S-LINK) communication error) is stored. Selection of operation status using system register27: -to continue operation, set K1 -to stop operation, set K0

A

Selec-table

MEWNET-F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power-down of a slave station. FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH: Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition. FP3: Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition. Selection of operation status using system register27: -to continue operation, set K1 -to stop operation, set K0

A A A

E47

MEW-NET-F attribute error

Selec-table

In the unit on the slave station, an abnormality such as: -missing unit -abnormal intelligent unit was detected. FP2, FP2SH, and FP10SH: Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition. FP3: Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition. Selection of operation status using system register28: -to continue operation,set 1 -to stop operation,set 0

A A A

E49

Expansion unit power supply sequence error

Stops

The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit. Turn on the power supply for the expansion unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on.

A

E50 Backup battery error

Conti-nues

The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed. ⇒ Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary. By setting the system register 4, you can disregard this self-diagnostic error.

A A A A A


Error code Name

Opera-tion


FP-e

FP0

FP0R

FPΣ

FP-X

FP2

FP2S

H

FP10

SH

E51

MEWNET-F terminal station error

Conti-nues

Terminal station setting was not properly performed. Check stations at both ends of the communication path, and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches.

A A A

E52

MEWNET-F I/O update synchro-nous error

Conti-nues

Set the INITIALIZE/TEST selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position. If the same error occurs after this, please contact your dealer.

A A A

E53

Multi-CPU I/O regis-tration error (CPU2 only)

Conti-nues

Abnormality was detected when the multi-CPU system was used. Please contact your dealer.

A

E54

IC memory card back-up battery error

Conti-nues

The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered. The BATT.LED does not turn on. Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card.(The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed.)

A A

E55

IC memory card backup battery error

Cont-inues

The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers. The BATT.LED does not turn on. Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card. (The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed.)

A A

E56

Incompat- ible IC memory card error

Cont-inues

The IC memory card installed is not compatible. Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH/FP10SH.

A A

E57

No unit for the configu-ration

Conti-nues

MEWNET-W2/MCU The MEWNET-W2 link unit or MCU(Multi communication unit) is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data. Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter.

A A

E100 to E199

Self-diagnostic error set by F148 (ERR)/P148(PERR) instruction

Stop The error specified by the F148 (ERR)/P148(PERR) instruction is occurred. ⇒ Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose.

A A A A A A

E200 to E299

Conti-nues

A A A A A A

A:Available


Table of MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Error

Error code Name Description

!21 NACK error Link system error !22 WACK error Link system error !23 Unit No. overlap Link system error

!24 Transmission format error Link system error

!25 Link unit hardware error Link system error

!26 Unit No. setting error Link system error !27 No support error Link system error !28 No response error Link system error !29 Buffer closed error Link system error !30 Time-out error Link system error

!32 Transmission impossible error Link system error

!33 Communication stop Link system error !36 No destination error Link system error

!38 Other communication error Link system error

!40 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data. !41 Format error A command was received that does not fit the format. !42 No support error A command was received that is not supported.

!43 Multiple frames procedure error

A different command was received when processing multiple frames.

!50 Link setting error A route number that does not exist was specified. Verify the route number by designating the transmission station.

!51 Transmission time-out error

Transmission to another device not possible because transmission buffer is congested.

!52 Transmit disable error

Transmission processing to another device is not possible.(Link unit runaway, etc.)

!53 Busy error Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame processing. Or, cannot be received because command being processed is congested.

!60 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used.

!61 Data error There was a mistake in the contact, data area, data number designation, size designation, range, or format designation.

!62 Registration over error

Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded or when there was no registration.

!63 PC mode error PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN mode.


Error code Name Description

!64 External memory error

An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM/IC memory card. There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card. -When loading, the specified contents exceeded the capacity. -Write error occurs. -ROM or IC memory card is not installed. -ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications -ROM or IC memory card board is not installed.

!65 Protect error A program or system register write operation was executed when the protect mode (password setting or DIP switch, etc.) or ROM operation mode was being used.

!66 Address error There was an error in the code format of the address data. Also .when exceeded or insufficient of address data, there was a mistake in the range designation.

!67 No program error and No data error

Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error. Or, reading was attempted of data that was not registered.

!68 Rewrite during RUN error

When inputting with programming tool software, editing of an instruction (ED,SUB,RET,INT,IRET,SSTP,and STPE) that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted. Nothing is written to the CPU.

!70 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process.

!71 Exclusive access control error

A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same time as a command being processed.


14.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL-COM commands

Command name Code Description

Read contact area

RC (RCS) (RCP) (RCC)

Reads the on and off status of contact. - Specifies only one point. - Specifies multiple contacts. - Specifies a range in word units.

Write contact area

WC (WCS) (WCP) (WCC)

Turns contacts on and off. - Specifies only one point. - Specifies multiple contacts. - Specifies a range in word units.

Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area. Write data area WD Writes data to a data area. Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter. Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value. Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value. Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value. Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored. Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.

Monitoring start MG Monitors a registered contact or data using the code “MC or MD”.

Preset contact area (fill command) SC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-point on and off pattern.

Preset data area (fill command) SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range.

Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register. Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.

Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs.

Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller.

Abort AB Aborts communication.


14.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data BCD data (Binary Coded Decimal)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000011 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000101 00000000 00000110 00000000 00000111

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0111

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F

00000000 00001000 00000000 00001001 00000000 00001010 00000000 00001011 00000000 00001100 00000000 00001101 00000000 00001110 00000000 00001111

0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0000 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 0001 0011 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0001 0101

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017

00000000 00010000 00000000 00010001 00000000 00010010 00000000 00010011 00000000 00010100 00000000 00010101 00000000 00010110 00000000 00010111

0000 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 0001 0111 0000 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0010 0001 0000 0000 0010 0010 0000 0000 0010 0011

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

0018 0019 001A 001B 001C 001D 001E 001F

00000000 00011000 00000000 00011001 00000000 00011010 00000000 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00011101 00000000 00011110 00000000 00011111

0000 0000 0010 0100 0000 0000 0010 0101 0000 0000 0010 0110 0000 0000 0010 0111 0000 0000 0010 1000 0000 0000 0010 1001 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001

.

.

. 63 . . .

255 . . .

9999

.

.

. 003F

.

.

. 00FF

.

.

. 270F

.

.

. 00000000 00111111

.

.

. 00000000 11111111

.

.

. 00100111 00001111

.

.

. 0000 0000 0110 0011

.

.

. 0000 0010 0101 0101

.

.

. 1001 1001 1001 1001


14.7 ASCII Codes


Record of changes Manual No. Date Description of changes ARCT1F333E ARCT1F333E-1 ARCT1F333E-2 ARCT1F333E-3 ARCT1F333E-4 ARCT1F333E-5 ARCT1F333E-6 ARCT1F333E-7 ARCT1F333E-8 ARCT1F333E-9 ARCT1F333E-10 ARCT1F333E-11

Sep.2001 Feb.2002 Nov.2002 May.2004 Apr.2006 Jan.2007 Jun.2007 Jun.2008 Feb.2009 Feb.2010 Sep.2011 Sep. 2012

First edition 2nd edition -Addisions: Control units FPG-C32T2,FPG-C24R2 Expansion unit FPG-XY64D2T Tool software FPWIN Pro Ver.4 3rd edition Additions : Control units FPG-C28P2(PNP output) Thermistor input function type (part nmber ending in TM) Expansion units Add information about inteligent units 4th edition Additions:Communication cassette AFPG806 Expansion unit FPG-XY64D2P(PNP type) Expansion Data Memory Unit FPG-EM1 Change of a chapter -Communication cassette -Computer Link -General-purpose Serial communication -PLC link

→ Chapter7 Communication cassette 5th edition Additions : FPΣ 32k Type 6th edition 7th edition Function addition only of FPΣ 32k Type Ver.3.10 or more 8th edition 9th edition Change in Corporate name 10th edition 11th edition Change in Corporate name 11th edition


Documents

Panasonic FP Sigma Programmable Controllers User's Manual